以下是小编精心整理的高三复习：高一教材双单元知识点复习unit11-12(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)，本文共14篇，供大家参考借鉴，希望可以帮助到有需要的朋友。
篇1：高三复习：高一教材双单元知识点复习unit1-2(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
Unit 1-2 Good friends & English around the world
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
引申词汇: honesty, bravery, loyalty, wisdom, argument, classical, classic, survival， pronunciation,
词法：
1. quality: n.质量，品质，特点, 作质量讲，不可数，作品质和特点讲，可数。
He has all the qualities of a successful business man.
Quality is more important than quantity.
One quality of wood is that it can burn.
2. loyal: adj. 忠诚的，忠贞的，(常用搭配：be loyal to …对……忠诚)
They are loyal supporters. He is loyal to his country.
3. handsome ,beautiful , pretty区别.
这四个单词之间有区别,但区别不大,beautiful一般指女子的“美”,handsome指男子相貌等方面长得“英俊”或女子健美的, pretty指女子“小巧玲珑”的“美”。
4. wise；clever；smart区别
wise意为“聪明；英明”，它常用来说明一个人有智慧，有远见，有谋略；也可指由于知识、经验丰富及良好的判断能力而正确对待或处理人和事，常用于正式、客气的场合。注意：它多用来说明名人或伟人。例如：
a wise saying 至理名言
The people had considered Abraham Lincoln to be a great leader，and a wise，kind and honest man.亚伯拉罕-林肯是人民公认的伟大领袖，一个英明、慈祥、诚实的人。
clever表示“聪明；灵巧”时，指人或动物的脑子灵活；指做成的事物时，常含有巧妙的意思；clever是一个常用词，用得最广。例如：
People love to see the clever monkey.人们爱看这只聪明的猴子。
That is a clever plan.那是个巧妙的计划。
smart与clever同义，但更强调机敏的，精明的。另外， 还有“时髦的，整洁的”之意。 例如： You cannot cheat him because he is a smart boy.你骗不了他，因为他是个聪明的男孩 。
smart restaurants 高档餐馆； You look smart in that suit. 你穿上这套衣服显得很精神。
bright意为“聪明；思路敏捷”，它多用来指年轻人或小孩，常用于口语中。例如:
She is really a bright little girl.她真是一个聪明的小姑娘。
The bright boy is reading English in the bright room.这个聪明伶俐的男孩在明亮的房间里读英语。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
4. classic, classical 区别
Classic 经典的，优秀的，一流的，典型的，古雅的
A classic movie/work经典影片/作品， a classic example/case 典型的例子/错误， a classic design 古雅的设计
Classical 西方古典的，传统的
A classical composer 古典作曲家 a classical theory 古典学说
5. argue (常用搭配：argue with sb about /over sth, argue for /against doing sth ; argue that …)
Argument 争吵，争论，理由，论点，论据
We had an argument with the waiter about the bill. 我们和服务员就帐单发生了争吵。
There are strong arguments for and against euthanasia. 对安乐死支持和反对者都提出了强有力的论据。
4. be into sth. 在非正式英语中，该短语表示“对……深感兴趣”，“深深迷上……”
eg. Her two children are into art.
5. alone 与lonely
alone: adj. “独自一人的”表示客观状态，无感情色彩。只能作表语，不能作定语。或指没有朋友的孤独, 寂寞，无依无靠。
adv. “独自、单独”
[注意] alone 用在名词或代词后面的时候表示“只有(only)”
lonely: adj. 表示人“孤独的，寂寞的”； 表示地方“荒凉的，人烟稀少的”，有感情色彩。既可做定语，也可做表语。
eg. (1) I am alone, but I don’t feel lonely.
(2) Chuck lived alone on the lonely island for five years.
(3) We have no idea why he left the company. Tom alone knows the secret.
(4) When people came to know that the girl was connected with the theft, no one liked to stay with her; so she felt very alone and in the end she went to a lonely village to live in.
6. name n. 名字， vt. 命名(常用搭配：name sth/sb after sb, call sb’s names , live up to one’s name )
He was named after his father. 他的名字和他父亲一样。
Chairs, tables, cabinets-you name it, he makes it. 椅子，桌子，橱柜――凡是你说得出的他都能做。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
7. survive vi. 生存，存活 vt. 幸免于难，挺过，比。。。活的时间长
I can’t survive on $40 a week. 我一星期40美圆，无法维持生活。
Many birds didn’t survive the winter. 许多鸟死于这次严冬。
She survived her husband by ten years. 丈夫死后她又活了10年。
8. think about 及其他
Think about 考虑，打算 don’t you ever think about other people? 你难道从来没考虑过别人？
Think for yourself 独立思考；自行决定
Think of sb /sth 想到， 认为
Can anybody think of a ay to raise money? 谁能想出集资的办法？
Politicians are not well thought of.
Think sth out 认真考虑，think sth over 慎重考虑， 仔细盘算； think through 充分考虑，想透； think sth up 想出，发明， think aloud 自言自语； think nothing of it. 别客气； think twice about sth 三思而行。 On second thought(s) 又一想，转念一想。
9. care about 关注，在意，担忧；关心，关怀；
She cares deeply about environmental issues. 她对环境问题深感担忧。
He cares about his employees.他关心他的雇员。
Care for 照顾，照料，非常喜欢
She moved back home to care for her elderly parents.
He cared for her more than she realized.
10. share (in ) sth有同样的感情或想法; share sth. (out ) among/ between sb. ; share sth. with sb.
eg. (1) We share the same room.
(2) True friends share in your sorrows as well as your joys.
(3) The teacher shared the books among the students.
(4) I will shall the cost with you.
n. 一份， 份额
eg. I take my share of the cost. 我负担我那部分的费用。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
11. Object n. 物体, 目标, 宾语, 对象 vi. 反对, 拒绝, 抗议 (object to ) vt. 提出...来反对(object that )
I really object to being charged for parking. 我真的反对为停车收费。
He objected that the police had arrested him without sufficient evidence. 他反对说警察没有足够证据就逮捕了他。
12. error n.错误, 过失, 误差解析：(be in error弄错了 stand in error弄错了 by error错误地 fall into an error误入歧途, 犯错误 in error弄错了的 错误地 lead sb. into error使犯错误 make an error出差错, 犯错误 commit an error出差错), 犯错误【同】 mistake 【辨析】 error 强调“违反某一既定标准, 不经心而做了错事, 产生偏差、疏忽或行动上的错误”, 如:an error in judgement判断上的错误。 mistake 指“由于粗心、不注意或在理解、认识或判断上的不正确而造成行动或看法上的错误”, 如: I take you as Li Xiaolai. I used your pen by mistake.我错拿了你的钢笔
Unit 2 English around the world
13. fly all the day direct from Seattle to London 看direct 和directly 区别
direct: used instead of directly in talking about journeys and timetables或表示亲自，直接
The plane goes direct from London to Houston.
The 10.40 goes direct to Leeds.
I prefer to dael with hi direct. 我更愿意直接跟他打交道。
Direct 其他用法
adj. 径直的, 直接的, 直系的, 直率的, [天]由西向东运行的, 顺行的
vt. 指引, 指示, 指挥, 命令, 导演
vi. 指导, 指挥
They are in direct contact with the hijackers.
the most direct route
Was that remark directed at me?
movie was directed by Steven Spielberg.
A police officer was directing the traffic.
The police officers had been directed to search the building.警察奉命搜查大楼。（很正式）
14. at all常用于否定句、疑问句和条件从句中以加强句子的语气，但在不同的句式中表示不同的意思。用于否定句，意思是“丝毫；根本”；用于疑问句，意思是“到底；究竟”；用于if条件句，意思是“既然；即使”。如
I don't like him at all. 我一点儿也不喜欢他。
It seems that women are either invisible in most school textbooks or, when they appear at all, they are seen performing low-status tasks.似乎女性在学校的教科书里没出现， 如果他们真的出现的话，她们也是在做低级的工作。
Why am I here at all? 我究竟在哪里？
They didn' t go there at all.他们根本没去过那地方。
Do it well if you do it at all.要做就要做得好。
Have you read any of the book at all?那本书你到底有没有读一点？
(2)at all有时也用于肯定句,但往往含有否定的意味.如:I'm surprised you came as all.想不到你还是来了.(原以为不会来)
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
15. not really不是这样的。
另外，最高级可被序数词以及by far，nearly，almost，by no means，not quite，not really，nothing like等词语所修饰. 例如： This hat is by far／much／nearly／almost／not nearly／by no means/not quite／nothing like the biggest．
16. （1）at home在此表示“舒适；无拘束”，常与 be， feel或 make等动词连用。如：Please sit down and make yourself at home.请坐下别拘束。 She always felt at home in the old hotel. 她住在那老旅馆总觉得舒适自在。
(2)at home还可表示“在家；在国内”，或表示“精通；熟悉”，常与 in，on或 with等介词连用。如：
Are your parents at home？你的父母在家吗？ She is at home in modem music.她精通现代音乐。
17. majority n. 多数,大部分。作主语，强调整体时，使用单数动词；若强调团体中的每个分子，则动词用复数形式。
The majority is (are ) against the plan. 大多数人都反对这个计划。
majority常用于a/the majority of … ……的多数。
The majority of his books are kept upstairs.他的大部分书收藏在楼上。
The majority of doctors believe smoking is harmful to health.大多数医生认为吸烟对健康有害。
The majority of people seem to enjoying watching the football game.大多数人似乎都喜欢看足球赛。
major adj. 主要的；重要的；一流的
majority与 most的比较：
majority n. 常与冠词连用，表示“……中的大多数”用a/the majority of + 名词或代词。 most用作不定代词或形容词，表示“大多数”可用most + 名词或most of + the + 名词或most of + 代词。
e.g. A/The majority of people seem to prefer TV to radio.
Most people seem to prefer TV to radio.
Most of the people seem to prefer TV to radio.
大多数人似乎都喜欢看电视而不喜欢听收音机。
Most of them speak English.他们中的大多数人说英语。
Most classical music sends me to sleep.古典音乐我大多听着听着就睡着了。
It rained for the most of the summer.夏天大部分时间都下雨。
18. total n. 总数。in total = in all = altogether总共，总计。
That will cost you 7.50 pounds in total.你总共要花7.50英磅。
In total, there are 250.000 books in the library.图书馆里总共有二十五万册图书。
adj. 整个的，全部的，总数的。
What is the total cost of our trip to the seaside?
v. 总数为，加起来是。
The money left totals only $15. How can we get back home.
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
19. more than 更多，不仅仅， 非常
I like her more than her husband. 我比较喜欢她，不喜欢她丈夫。
Signing the forms is little more than (= only=no more than) a formality. 在表格上签名仅仅是一种形式。
I’m more than happy (= extremely happy) to take you there in my car. 我非常乐意用我的车带你去那儿。
She was more than a little shaken (= extremely shaken) by the experience. 这次经历对她产生了巨大的震动。
20. except , except for , 区别 （160页教材解析）
Except经常引起同类事物中被排除的一项。 Except for 用来引述细节以修正句子的主要意思。后面的名词与前面的名词经常不是同一类。
He goes to work every day ____rainy days.
A. except on B. except for C. but that D. besides 答案是A。
He is a good man except for hot temper.
And now it's almost finished, except for one last job.
Except for Governmental action, there will be no increase in the cost of your holiday.
besides意思是“除……之外（还有）…..”,其内涵是“加上”。
e.g. Do you know other language besides German?
Li Lei also went to the park besides you.
except that (wh-) 其后需加从句，用来表示理由或细节，修正前面所说的情况。可以与except for互换。
e.g. Your composition is well-written except that there are some spelling mistakes.
I usually go to school by bike except when it rains.
21. stay up 不睡觉，熬夜，不倒塌。
The student stayed up all night to study.
Tell him to stay up until I get home.
Some strong houses stayed up in the earthquake.
22. difficulty (have difficulty(in) doing做某事有困难（费力）。)做可数名词时，表示“一件困难的事”，做不可数名词时，表示“困难”。
eg. (1) Do you have any difficulty in learning English?你学英语很吃力吗？
(2) Everyone in the town knew him , so we had no difficulty in finding his house.
城里人人都认识他，所以，我们毫不费力地找到了他的家。
如果difficulty后接名词时，名词前面要加with，即have difficulty with something。同样的用法还有：be busy doing something, be busy with something。help somebody (to) do something, help somebody with something。
另外，difficulty还可以用trouble或problem替换。
23. come about（某情况）发生
Sometimes it is hard to tell how a quarrel comes about. 有时候很难解释争吵发生的原因。
I will never understand how it came about that you were on hour late on such a short journey.
我真不懂这么短的路程你怎么会迟到一个小时。
表示“发生”的动词和动词词组还有：happen, take place, break out等。这些动词或动词词组都是不及物动词的性质，因此，都没有被动语态。
引申：come 其他词组
Come to 涉及，说到 (when it comes to …) 达到（come to nothing 没有结果）苏醒(come to oneself)
How come….. 怎么回事？If she spent 5 years in Paris, how come her French is so bad?
Come across 偶然遇见， （被理解，被弄懂，给人以。。。印象）
Come after sb 追赶，追随
Come along 一起来，快点 I’m glad you come along. Come along! We are late already!
come at 扑向， come back 回来，回想起 come down 下来，得病（come down with）come on 加油，催促 come out 出现，出版 come over 顺便来访， come up （植物）发芽，（问题等）出现，发生
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
24. .end up 最后有某种结局，最后成了，结束。
If you go on like this you’ll end up in prison. 如果你继续这样，早晚得进监狱。
He ended up as the head of the firm.
At first they hated each other, but they ended up getting married. 起初他们互相仇恨，到后来却成了夫妻。
引申：end in sth 以。。。结尾，末端是
The word I’m thinking of ends in ‘-ous’. 我想到的词以ous 结尾。
Their long struggle ended in failure. 他们的长期斗争以失败告终。
句法
1. nor do I like computers.
So is skiing
常用的表示“也”的句型：肯定：so +be /do ／have+主语 否定：neither /nor +be/do/have +主语, so it is with me
1) If you don’t go, neither will I.
2) - Do you know Tom bought a new car?
- I don't know, _______.
A. nor don't I care B. nor do I care C. I don't care neither D. I don't care also
3) It is such a difficult task and I am afraid I can’t complete it in time. ---So it is with me.
4) She is such a lovely girl. ---So she is.
5) The teacher told us to improve our listening, and so we did.
2. 直接引语和间接引语
直接引语/间接引语答题技巧：
一字不改地引述的别人的话，叫做直接引语；用说话人自己的话转述的别人的话，叫做间接引语。
e.g. “ I can see him now,” the boss said. (直接引语)
The boss said that he could see you now. (间接引语)
直接引语变为间接引语会产生以下的变化：
1． 时态的变化 主句和从句的时必须保持一致 （现在对现在；过去对过去）
2． 人称的变化 从句的人称根据主句的主语的着眼点来决定（you---I/me/we/us）
3． 时间状语的变化 now---then; today----that day; tonight---that night; yesterday---the day before; the day before yesterday---two days before; three days ago---three days before; tomorrow---the next day; the day after tomorrow---in two days’ time; next week/year etc.---the next week/year etc.
4． 个别词的变化 this---that; these----those; come---go; bring---take
篇2：高三复习：高一教材双单元知识点复习unit5-6(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
Unit 5 The silver screen
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
1. While still a student, she played roles in many plays. 当她还是一个学生时，就多次在话剧中扮演角色了。
While still a student 相当于While she was still a student.在英语中有些表示时间、条件、方式或让步等的从句有时可省略一些成分：如果从句的主语和从句的主语一致（或者是从句的主语是it），而且从句谓语中又包含be，那么这个主语和be动词都可以省略。例如：
Don’t talk while (you are) eating.
When (he was) asked how he gained first place, he suddenly became cheerful.
If (they are)operated by computer in the future, many of the trains will have no drivers.
Although (it was)sold by a German company for the first time in 1899, aspirin has been around much longer than that.
They looked around the room as if (they were) looking for something.
The boys will go out to play football whenever (it is) possible.
2. marry 用法
marry在大多数情况下是及物动词，（常用搭配：get/be married to sb , marry sb）
When did she get married? 她是什么时候结婚的？
在有副词修饰时，marry可作不及物动词用。
She married very early. 她结婚很早。
“和某人结婚”不能说“marry with sb.”, 应该说“marry to sb.”也可以不与介词搭配，将marry用作及物动词。
She married a doctor. or: She was married to a doctor. 她和一个医生结了婚。
3. degree n. 度，级； 程度； 学位
The summer months has an average temperature of more than 30 degrees centigrade.
夏天平均温度超过30度。
He has a high degree of ability.他能力很高。
He took his degree in physics at the university last year.他去年在大学里获得了物理学位。
to a ……degree, to a degree that 到……程度, 在……程度上
I agree with you to some degree.在一定程度上我同意你。
4. speed n. 速度 with great speed以很快速度 /at top (full, low, safe, high, ordinary) speed以顶尖速度/ 以全速/ 以低速/ 以安全的速度/ 以高速/ 以一般的速度
at a speed of 100 kilometers an hour以每小时100公里的速度
如以某个东西的速度为参照, 则为: at the speed of, 用定冠词。如：
at the speed of sound以光的速度
2）v.快速地前进 过去式sped (常用搭配：speed up 加速)
He sped down the street. 他沿街快速前进。 The time sped quickly by.时间飞快地过去。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
5. keep构成的一些短语
keep(sb.)away(from sth.)(使)离开(某物) , keep sb.from doing sth.阻止某人做某事
keep sth.in mind记住某事, keep sb./sth. out(of sth.)不让……入内
keep back忍住(眼泪)，扣下，隐瞒, keep in touch with 与……保持联系
keep(on)doing sth.继续做某事, keep off远离，避开
keep up 保持(不低落)， 振作， （保持同一水平如：We are having difficulty keeping up our mortgage payments. 我们难以继续偿还按揭贷款。）
keep up with 跟上，不落在后面
6. afford的用法 及物动词，其主要用法如下：
(1)“担负得起(……的费用、时间)”，常与can, could, be able to连用，表示“有足够的(时间、金钱等)条件(做某事)”。
afford +n./pron, . afford to do sth.
Now many people can’t afford the medical treatment in the country. 现在在农村许多人看不起病。
I can’t afford the time for it. 这时间我花不起。
We can’t afford to buy this new house. 我们买不起这新房子。
7. 关系副词when/where不能替代“介词+which”的场合归纳。
在定语从句中，when/where往往可以代替某些“介词+which”。
Tell me the time when/at which the train leaves. 告诉我火车发车的时间。
但在下列情况下，when/where不能代替“介词+which”。
(1)当since, until, after, before+which时，不能被when代替。
I met Jack in 1980, since which I have never seen him. 我是在1980年见过杰克的，自从那时以来再也没见他。
He came back at ten, until which we worked. 他十点钟回来的，直到那时我们还在劳动。
He went to school at 8, before which he read English. 他八点钟上学，这之前他读了英语。
(2)当on, behind, in front of, through, from, beside, around +which时，不能被where代替。
I saw a desk on which was a book. 我看见一张桌子上有本书。
The house, in front of which there is a tree, is my home. 那所房子是我的家，其前有棵树。
This is the window through which the thief came in. 这就是贼从那进来的那个窗户。
8. by sea, by the sea, in the sea, on the sea
by sea “走海路，乘船”，用来表示交通方式，同by ship同义。
These heavy boxes should be sent by sea. 这些重箱子应由海路运送。
by the sea “在海边”，相当于on the coast。
There are many travelers by the sea. 海边有很多游客。
in the sea “在海里，在海水中”
There are many plants and animals in the sea. 海洋中有很多动植物。
(4)on the sea “在海上”，也有“在海边”的意思。
It was reported that many boats sailing on the sea had been lost. 据报道，在海上航行的很多船只失踪了。
9. take off 1)脱下(衣服等), 解(除)掉 2）（飞机）起飞 取消，停演， 迅速流行，突然大受欢迎
the new magazine has really taken off. 这份新杂志真是大受欢迎。
He took off his wet shoes.他脱下了湿鞋子。
The show was taken off because of poor audience. 该剧因为不卖座停演了。
The plane took off on time. It was a smooth take-off.飞机准时起飞。起飞非常顺利。
10. be afraid, be afraid to do sth., be afraid of(doing)sth.
(1)be afraid意为“担心，害怕”，多用于口语，常用来表示一种歉意，或遗憾，后可接so或that，也可接that从句。I’m afraid(that) 其语意相当于I’m sorry, but…。
-Are we on time? 我们准时吗？ -I’m afraid not. 恐怕不准时。
-Are we late? 我们迟到了吗？-I’m afraid so. 恐怕迟到了。
(2)be afraid to do常表示“由于胆小而不敢做某事”。
She is afraid to be here alone. 她不敢单独呆在这里。
He is afraid to jump into the river from the bridge. 他不敢从桥上跳进河里。
(3)be afraid of(doing)sth.常表示“担心或害怕某事(发生)”。
He was afraid to walk across the one-logged bridge because he was afraid of falling into the river. 他不敢过那个独木桥，因为他担心会掉进河水里。
I was afraid of hurting her feelings. 我担心伤害她的感情。
We are not afraid of difficulties. 我们不怕困难。
4) 给人不愉快的信息或不赞同某人意见时，用I’m afraid …
I’m afraid I’ve got bad news for you.
I’m afraid I can’t agree with you.
11. go wrong v. 走错路, 误入岐途, (机器等)发生故障
His friends helped him go wrong. 他的朋友把他带坏了。
Please correct my spelling If I go wrong. 如果我写错了，请纠正我的拼写。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
12. high与highly
(1)high既可用作形容词，也可用作副词，表示具体的“高的”“高地”之意。
The wall is two metres high. 这堵墙有两米高。
They were climbing a high mountain. 他们在爬一座高山。
Can you jump that high? 你能跳那么高吗？
The kite was flying high in the sky. 风筝在天空中高高地飞翔着。
(2)highly是副词，表示抽象的意思，“高地，高度地”。
He is a highly skilled worker. 他是一个高度熟练的技术工人。
The headmaster thought highly of our work. 校长高度评价了我们的工作。
13. owe vt. 1）欠(钱、物、债等)，后面通常接直接宾语和间接宾语，即owe sb sth 或owe sth to sb.
例如: I owe $20 to the tailor. 我欠裁缝二十美圆。
I owed John 60 dollars when I was in Paris.我在巴黎时，欠约翰60美圆。
2）应该……归功于……应当给予……
I owe it to you that I’m still alive. 我现在还活着，应该感谢你。
If I have improved in any way, I owe it all to my teacher.如果说我有一些进步，这应该全部归功于我的老师。
I owe you many thanks.我非常感谢你。
We should do the duty which we owe to our country.我们应当对国家尽我们应尽的义务。
同义词：because of, thanks to, due to
14. After that it still took seven years before they finally got married. 从那以后过了七年他们才结婚。
before……（以后）才。例如：
It was a long time before I got to sleep last night.昨天夜里过了好久我才睡着。
It will be four years before we meet again.四年以后我们才能再见面。
注意before的特殊用法：
1）不等．．．．．．就，
He went out before I had (had) a chance to tell him the good news.
我还没来得及告诉他这个消息他就已经出去了。
2）（不多久．．．．．．）就
We hadn’t waited long before the bus came.我们没等多久，公共汽车就来了。
It won’t be long before you get well again.不久你就可以恢复健康了。
3）宁愿．．．．．．，也不．．．．．．
He will die of hunger before he will steal 他宁愿饿死，也决不行窍。
15. look up 查询（如宾语为代词，则代词放中间）
Look up the word in the dictionary.在字典里查单词。
相关词组：look for 寻找；look after照顾，照料； look forward to期待；look into调查； look on旁观；look out注意；look out for注意，留心，提防；look over翻阅，查看，检查；look around环视；look through翻阅，查看。
16. stay away 不上班，不上学
17. run away from 从。。。逃走
18. determine to do , be determined to do 名词：determination
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
Unit 6. good manners
1. manner
(1)用作可数名词，意思是“方法”，“方式”，通常用单数形式。
I love duck cooked in Chinese manner. 我喜欢吃中国烧法的鸭子。
(2)用作可数名词，意思是“举止”，“态度”，常用单数形式。
I don't like his manner. It's too rude. 我不喜欢他的举止，太粗鲁了。
(3)用作复数形式，意思是“礼貌”，“规矩”。
It is bad manners to speak loudly in public. 在公共场合高声讲话是没礼貌的。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
2. none，no one，nothing
①none用于指人和物，可与of短语连用，用作单数和复数。
--“How many elephants did you see in the park?”
--“None．” -你在公园里看到几头大象? -一头也没看到。
②no one只能指人，不能与of连用，用作单数。
No one knows what they fought for． 没有人知道他们为什么发生战争。
③nothing用于指物，不与of连用，通常泛指“没有什么事情或东西”，用作单数。
Nothing can change the world． 什么也不能改变世界。
3. Custom, culture, habit，hobby 区别
[辨析]custom，habit，hobby
这三个词都有“习惯”的意思，但含义有一定的不同。
①custom通常指大范围、长时间形成的风俗和习惯。也可指生活习惯，后接不定式.
②habit habit指个人生活习惯、个人的习惯有好有坏，后接of doing，不可接不定式。“(有)养成……习惯”常用be in/fall into/get into/form/have the habit of doing sth.句型；“戒掉……习惯”常用give up/kick/break away from/get out of the habit of doing sth.句型.
③hobby通常指“爱好”。
The Spring Festival is a custom in East Asia． 春节是东亚的一个风俗。
He formed a habit of getting up early． 他养成早起的习惯。
Reading is his hobby． 看书是他的爱好。
Culture 文化，文明（国家或群体的风俗，信仰，艺术，生活方式及社会组织）
4. impression
(1)通常用作可数名词，意思是“印象，感想”，
e．g．He made a strong impression on (upon)us．他给我们留下了深刻的印象。
(2)impression的动词是impress，意思是“留下印象”。常用短语impress sth. on (upon)sb．“某事给某人留下印象”。
e．g．What he did was greatly impressed on(upon)us．他所做的一切给我们留下深深的印象。
The girl impressed her sense of humour on(upon)her friends．这个女孩的幽默感给她的朋友留下深刻的印象。
5. at table意思是“就餐，吃饭”。at the(a)table表示“在桌子旁”。
You shouldn't speak loudly at table. 吃饭时你不该高声讲话。
He sat at the table，reading a novel． 他坐在桌子旁，看小说。
6. advice n. 忠告，劝告，建议
ask for one’s advice 征求某人的建议 give/offer sb. advice 给某人建议
take/follow one’s advice 接受某人的建议 some advice on/about… 有关……的建议（忠告）
advise v.劝告，建议（advise doing, advise sb to do ）
I advise that he should go at once.
我建议他马上去。 注：advise接从句时，从句中的谓语动词用虚拟语气，形式为“should+动词原形”，should可以省略。
7. When drinking to someone's health，you raise your glasses，but the glasses should not touch． 在为某人健康干杯时，你举起杯子，但杯子不能碰撞。
(1)drink在此句中意思是“干杯”，通常与介词to连用。
Let's drink to the health of my teacher. 让我们为我的老师健康干杯。
(2)drink还有“饮，喝”，“举杯祝贺”的意思。
e．g．Let's drink beer together． 让我们一起喝啤酒。
They drank success to the professor． 他们举杯祝贺那位教授成功。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
8. raise，rise，lift
①raise用作及物动词，意思是“举起，抬起，抬高”，说明主语发出的动作是要作用于其它事物的。
②rise用作不及物动词，意思是“升起，上升，起立”，说明主语自身移向较高的位置。
③lift用力“举起”的含义。
Price has been raised up． 价格被提高了。
Price rises gradually． 价格渐渐地涨上去了。
The young lifted the stone at last． 那个年轻人终于举起那块石头。
9. follow用法归纳
(1)表示“跟随，马上就来”。
I’m sending the letter today，the packet will follow later. 今天我先把信寄出，随后寄出包裹。
(2)表示“遵循，依照……行事”。
The villagers still follow the customs that are passed down from their ancestors.
村民们还沿袭着祖先留下的风俗。
(3)表示“听懂，理解”。
As a beginner，she cannot follow the English Home Service quite well on the radio.
作为初学者，她无法完全听懂广播《英语家庭服务》。
(4)表示“如下”。
He received a note which ran as follows:“ The meeting will be delayed until next Monday.”
他收到一张便条，上面写着如下内容：“会议推迟到下星期一。”
10. sometimes，sometime，some time
①sometimes副词，表示“有时候，不时”。
Sometimes he is late for class． 他有时上课迟到。
②sometime副词，表示“曾经，某时，有朝一日”，常同过去时或将来时连用，表示过去或未来某一不肯定的时间。
It happened sometime 1ast year． 那是去年某一天发生的。
Will you come and see me sometime? 你哪一天来看看我好吗?
③some time名词词组，表示“一段时间”。
e．g．It will take me some time to read the novel． 读这本小说花了我一些时间。
There is some time left. 还剩一些时间。
11. leave out 省去，遗漏，不考虑
e．g．You can leave out their plan. 你们能够不考虑他们的计划。
You shouldn't leave out this important detail in the trial．在审判中，你不该漏掉这个重要细节。
12. at this moment 在这时候； for a moment 片刻，一会儿；（at） any moment 任何时刻；马上；at the last moment 在紧要关头，在最后关头；at the moment 此刻；正当那时；暂时
for the moment 目前，暂时；in a moment 马上，立刻
the moment (that)一……就……
The moment he saw me，he turned pale. 他一看见我就脸色苍白。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
练习（unit 5）
19. 单句改错
1.The baby after whom she is looking is my little nephew.
简析：after应置于looking之后，短语动词look after不能拆开。
2.I saw all the apples which were on the table fall off into the floor.
简析：应将which改为that。当先行词被all, any, few, little, no等词修饰时，关系代词应选用that, 不能用which。
3.The speaker raised his voice but still couldn’t make himself hearing.
简析：应将hearing改为heard。make oneself heard意为“让别人听到自己的声音”。“make oneself+过去分词”结构中，过去分词作宾语补足语，宾语oneself与宾补之间是被动关系。
4.This is the only bus which there is to the village.
简析：将“which”改为“that”。在这个句子中，that there is to the village是定语从句，是there be句型，修饰其先行词bus。而且先行词bus被the only修饰。bus在定语从句中作主语，to the village也作bus的定语。整个句子意为“这是惟一通往那个村庄的一辆汽车”。
20. 高考真题
1.(NMET )Cleaning women in big cities usually get ___________ by the hour.
A. pay B. paying C. paid D. to pay
简析：选C。“按小时付报酬”与主语是被动关系，应选过去分词paid。类似的表达常见的还有：get burnt, get wounded, get married等。
2. (NMET 1998)European football is played in 80 countries, ___________it the most popular sport in the world.
A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
简析：选A。本句意为“八十多个国家都踢欧式足球，这使其成为世界上最流行的运动”。此处应选现在分词作状语。此题可用排除法来考虑；不表目的，不用不定式，排除D；不是完整的句子，不用谓语动词，排除B。其后跟有宾语和宾语补足语，不可能是被动的，排除C。特别要注意make后接复合宾语这种句型。
3. ( 上海)He’s got himself into a dangerous situation ___________he is likely to lose control over the plane.
A. where B. which C. while D. why
简析：选A。此题考查定语从句中关系副词的用法。定语从句的先行词为situation，引导从句的词在定语从句中作状语，因此这个复合句中的定语从句应由关系副词where引导。
4. (NMET 2001春招)Would you slow down a bit, please? I can’t ___________you.
A. keep up with B. put up with C. make up to D. hold on to
简析：选A。此项中的短语keep up with含义为“跟上，赶上”，从上文的提示“让对方慢下来一点”，体会出是“跟不上对方”，故选A。
5. (NMET 2001)The film brought the hours back to me ___________I was taken good care of in that far-away village.
A. until B. that C. when D. where
简析：选C。通过分析句子结构，可以看出这是一个包含定语从句的复合句。先行词是the hours，引导词在定语从句中作状语，因此要用when来引导此定语从句。有时命题者会在先行词与引导词之间加入附加成分，影响考生正常的解题思路，需特别注意。
Unit 6 能力训练
1. 单句改错
1.It’s time for us to clean the desks. But we can’t find any clothes.
简析：把clothes改为cloths。cloth作不可数名词时，是“布匹”的意思，它作可数名词时表示有特殊用途的布，其复数形式为cloths,而clothes是“衣服”的意思，不符合本句意思，故改为cloths表示“擦桌布”。
2.He prefer swimming to play football in summer.
简析：将play改为playing。prefer A to B 等于like A better than B，即喜欢A胜过喜欢B，prefer+名词/动名词+to+名词/动名词，to 为介词，故不能接动词原形。
3.The girl students in our school are not allowed wearing high-heel shoes.
简析：把wearing改为to wear。allow可接带不定式的复合结构，“allow sb.to do sth.”表示“允许某人做某事”，其被动式应为“sb.be allowed to do sth.”。另外，allow可跟动名词作宾语，构成allow doing sth.表示“允许做某事”，此结构不可用于表达该句意义。
4.My house is quite close from the station.
简析：把from改为to。表示“接近于……”，应该是“be close to”，而不用“be close from”。
5.I apologize you that I had been so rude to you.
简析：此句应为I apologize(to you) for being so rude to you.
表示“为某事向某人道歉”用apologize to sb.for sth./doing sth.,不能用that引导从句。
2. 高考真题
1.(上海，42)-You’ve given us a wonderful Chinese dinner, Mrs.Wang.
-___________.
A. Oh,I’m afraid I didn’t cook very well B. I’m glad you enjoyed it
C. Come again when you are free D. It’s not necessary for you to say so
简析：选B。此题要注意两种文化背景的不同而带来的行为习惯的差异。
2. (2000上海)-I don’t have any change with me. Will you pay the fare for me?
-___________.
A. That’s fine B. Nothing serious C. Never mind D. No problem
简析：选D。D是回答别人的请求的用语，相当于“没问题”。
3. (NMET 2000春)It was an exciting moment for these football fans this year,___________for the first time in years their team won the World Cup.
A. that B. while C. when D. which
简析：选C。此处是非限制性定语从句，排除while(不引导定语从句)和that(不引导非限制性定语从句)。关系词在从句中作时间状语，要用关系副词when，而不用关系代词which。
4. (NMET 2000)Dorothy was always speaking highly of her role in the play, _____,of course, made the others unhappy.
A. who B. which C. this D. what
简析：选B。“of course”是插入语，略去不管则可看出，此处是个非限制性定语从句，需添一个关系词，排除this 和what。又因先行词是事情“always speaking highly of her role in the play”,因此用which,而不用who。
5. (NMET 2001春)John said he’d been working in the office for an hour,___________was true.
A. he B. this C. which D. who
简析：选C。此处是非限制性定语从句，需用关系代词，排除A. he和B. this。先行词不是“人”(不是说“约翰是真的”)，排除C. who。先行词是事物(是说“he’d been working in the office for an hour”是真实情况)，关系代词用which。
6. (NMET 2001春)-Why haven’t you bought any butter?
-I___________to but I forgot about it.
A. liked B. wished C. meant D. expected
简析：选C。“mean to (buy some butter)”表示“本意是(要买些黄油)”，用了过去式表示“原打算”，此处将不定式省略，只留了不定式符号“to”。“like to do sth. ”是“喜欢干某事”；“wish to do sth. ”是“希望做某事”；“expect to do sth. ”是“预计干某事”都与上下文题义不合。
篇3：高三复习：高一教材双单元知识点复习unit7-8(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
Unit 7 cultural relics
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
1． Where there is a river, there is a city. 有河流的地方就有城市。
=there is a city at the place where there is a rive.
Where 在这里引导的是地点状语从句，相当于介词in/at/to+ the place +where 从句（定语从句），意思是“在……地方”。例如：
Crops grow well where there is a plenty of sunshine. 阳光充足的地方庄稼就长得好。
Where there is oppression ,there is fighting. 哪里有压迫，哪里就有反抗。
Where there is a sound, there must be sound waves. 有声音的地方，一定有声波。
Where there is smoke, there is fire. 有烟的地方就有火。
Where bees are, there is honey. 有蜜蜂的地方就有蜂蜜。
Where there is a will, there is a way. 有志者事竟成。
2. under prep. being in a state of (sth.) 在（某事物）的状况中
under control under study under repair
under examination under construction under discussion
引申：repair用作复数形式，意思是“修理工作，修理工程”。（The shop is closed during the repairs．商店内部整修，暂停营业。）
3. give in 屈服，投降, 提交，呈交 give up 放弃
He has given in to my view. 他已经屈服于我的观点了。
Give in your examination papers when you have finished. 答完卷子后就交卷吧。
You shouldn’t give up hope. 你不该放弃希望。
He gave up his position as a manager. 他放弃了经理的职位。
I give up. Tell me the answer. 我放弃，告诉我答案。
有关give一词还有如下短语：
give away 赠送，颁发，泄露 give back 归还，同return
give off 发出（烟、光、热等） give out 筋疲力尽；耗尽，分发，散发；
4. seem后接形容词，名词，不定式，分词或介词短语等作表语
He seems quite pleased with your work.
He seemed to have a high opinion of you.
He seems a foolish boy.
It seems raining.
Everybody seems in high spirits.
注意：（1）seem后接to be 时，注意to be 的省略。
e.g. Tom came to see you this morning. He seemed (to be ) tired.
Yesterday I met a man who seemed to be the boss.(此时的to be 不能省略。因为名词前没有修饰语)
（2）seem 的否定形式。有两种：
e.g. She doesn’t seem to be at home. She seems not to be at home.
(3) There be 句型中
There seems (to be) something wrong with your computer.
(4) It seems 后接that 或as if从句，引导词that 或as if有时可省。
e.g. It seems (as if) there will be an election soon.
It seems to me that he is right.
(5) seem like = look like 看起来好象
They seemed like many little flags.
(6) seem to be doing sth.好像在做某事
They seem to be working in the field.他们好像在地里干活。
(7)seem to have done/been…好像已经……
e.g. The girl seems to have learnt about that sad news.那女孩似乎已经知道那使人悲伤的消息。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
5. in ruins 成为废墟，严重受损
An earthquake left the whole town in ruins.那次地震过后，全城到处是残垣断壁。
His career is/lies in ruins. 他已前途尽毁。
ruin 用作动词，意思是“毁坏，使毁灭”，常用作及物动词。
The earthquake in 1976 ruined the whole city of Tangshan．一九七六年地震毁坏了整个唐山。
(2)用作不可数名词，意思是“毁灭，崩溃”。
e．g．The accident brought him to ruin all his life. 这个事故毁灭了他一生。
(3)用作复数形式，意思是“废墟，遗迹”。
The visitors were struck by the ruins of Rome．参观者被古罗马的遗迹迷住了。
6. bring．．．back to life“使……恢复生机”。
The trees and flowers bring the city back to life．树木和鲜花使这座城市恢复了生机。
bring back 意思是“带回来、拿回来、使恢复；使回忆起”，通常用作及物动词。
Remember to bring back the book next time．记住下次把书带回来。
This medicine can bring him back to health. 这药能让他恢复健康。
引申：bring 其他搭配
Bring down 打垮，击败，使降低 bring in 挣，引进， bring on 使发展，导致（常指坏事），促使提高，促使生长 bring out 使显出，阐明，生产，出版 bring up 抚养，养育（be brought up to do We were brought up to respect authority. ）
7．include
(1) include 作及物动词，意思为“包含，包括”
That book includes 3 color pages.
(2) including 作介词，后接名词、代词做宾语。
There were six people in the room, including 3 children.
(3) included 过去分词充当的形容词，前面加名词和代词。
e.g. Ten of us went swimming this afternoon, our teacher included.
Six people, ______ three women, died in the battle.
Six people, three women ______, died in the battle.
The plan _______ most of your suggestions.
8. Strong，proud and united，the people of St Petersburg are the modern heroes of Russia．
强壮、自豪而团结的圣彼得堡人民是俄国现代英雄。句中 strong，proud and united是形容词，在句中作状语，表示伴随情况。
在英语中，形容词或形容词短语，在句中可用作状语。可以放在句末，也可放在句首。
Full of anger again，Crusoe returned home． 克鲁索又满心怒气地回家了。(伴随状语)Thirsty and eager to get a rest，he went into the tea-house and sat down at a little table by the window． 由于有些口渴，又想休息一下，他就走进茶馆，在靠窗子的一张小桌旁坐下。(原因状语)
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
9. represent 代表 representative 可数名词，意思为“代表”
represent sth. 代表 represent sth. (to sb.) 向……说明，阐述，表达
represent oneself as / to be自称是，声言
He represents himself as an expert in English. 他自称是英语专家。
He represented China in the conference． 他代表中国参加这个会议。
The dove represents peace． 鸽子象征和平。
The picture represents the battle of Waterloo．这幅画描绘的是滑铁卢战役。
10. Portrait 肖像，画像，通常用作可数名词。
This is a portrait of me． 这是我的肖像。
辨析：portrait，picture，painting，drawing
①portrait“肖像”，“画像”，尤其指面部的相片，也可指生动的人物描写或刻画。
②picture 指广义的“图画，照片”。
③painting 指着色的“画”。
④drawing 指“钢笔或铅笔线条画，素描”。
10. hope 意思是“希望”，后面不能直接跟名词作宾语，但可跟 for+名词，表示可实现的“希望”，后面也可跟 that 引导的从句。
e．g．I hope for success． 我希望成功。
I hope that you will be better soon． 我希望你能很快好起来。
11. Breath 用作名词，意思是“呼吸，气息”。
He ran upstairs out of breath． 他上气不接下气跑上楼来了。
When he saw the 1ion，he held his breath. 当他看到狮子时，他不出声。
(2)由 breath 构成的常见短语。
catch one's breath 屏息，喘息 hold one's breath 不出声，屏息 short of breath 呼吸短促 lose one's breath 喘不过气来 out of breath 上气不接下气
12. It is said that…. Sb./ sth. is said to be /do
“据说……听说……”， it 为形式主语，代替后面的that 从句和不定式短语。
e.g. It is said that the strange old man is a great artist.
= The strange old man is said to be a great artist.
13. build, set up, found 和put up
(1)build “建造，建立，建设”其后可接具体的或抽象的名词。
e.g. They wanted to build a state of their own.
(2)set up “开办，建立”常和表示组织、机构、团体等意义的名词连用，这时和build的 用法基本相同。但build更注重打基础，set up 表示用基金创立。set up a school/ government
(3) found“兴建，建立，创办”后面可接城市、国家、党派等。还可表示捐资兴办学校/政府。 e.g. found a new school
(4) put up着重指建造或搭建起一个具体的物体. e.g. put up a building
14.space表示“太空、空间”，多用作不可数名词
in space 在太空，在空间（不要带任何冠词） outer space 外层空间
There are millions of stars in space moving continuously.
太空中有数以百万计的星星在不停的运动。
He was staring into space.他极目远眺。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
15. 能力训练
(一)单句改错
1.Wang Hong is impossible to attend the meeting.
简析：本句应改为It is impossible for Wang Hong to attend the meeting。因为impossible不能修饰人，也不用它来作某人的表语，它只能用来修饰物。
2.I won’t come without inviting to the meeting.
简析：本句应改为I won’t come without being invited to the meeting.“invite”为及物动词，有“invite sb. to +n.”与“invite sb. to do sth.”。此处的“invite”的逻辑宾语是句子的主语“I”，因此，此处的“without”之后该用“being invited to do”。
3.He seemed that he had seen the film several times.
简析：本句应改为It seemed that he had seen the film several times.“seem”表示“似乎”“好像”时，常见句型有：
(1)It seems/seemed that…
(2)Sb. seems/seemed (to be)+adj./n.
(3)Sb. seems/seemed to do sth.
(4)It seems/seemed as if…
4.Almost all the buildings were in ruin.
简析：本句中的“ruin”应改为“ruins”。因为“(be) in ruins”为一固定短语，意为“成为废墟”。
5.It was foolish for him to waste his money on such a computer.
简析：应把for改为of。因为这里是“对人的评价”，而不是“对事的评价”。“对人的评价”应用句型“It is+adj.+of sb. to do sth.”“对事的评价”则是“It is+adj.+for sb. to do sth.”详解见知识归纳1。
6.Having got a driving license,he tried to drive on real road.
简析：“tried to drive”应改为“tired driving”。因为“try doing sth.”意为“尝试做某事”，而“try to do sth.”则是“尽力去做某事”。
二。 高考真题
1.(上海高考)The ___________ boy was last seen ___________ near the East Lake.
A. missing; playing B. missing; play C. missed; played D. missed; to play
简析：选A。该题译为“那个丢失的小男孩最后一次被看见时正在东湖边玩耍。”“missing”表示“丢失的”，see sb .do sth.表示“看见某人做了某事”，see sb. doing sth.表示“看见某人正在做某事”。据题意，只能选A。选项B、C、D动词形式均不对。
2.(NMET )You should make it a rule to leave things ___________ you can find them again.
A. when B. where C. then D. there
简析：选B。本题考查副词when和where的使用，也涉及表示时间的then和表示地点的there。题干中to leave things和find them again是关键提示。由此可确定需选用与地点有关的副词；又从句子结构判断，后面分句应为地点状语从句，修饰动词leave，因而选择B项。
3.(20春季高考)All the preparations for the task ___________,and we’re ready to start.
A. completed B. complete C. had been completed D. have been completed
简析：选D。此处谓语动词应选被动式，表示“准备工作被完成”，排除A和B。又因下文用现在时“are ready”，上文也应着眼在现在，用现在完成时，表示过去动作“完成了准备工作”对现在的影响是“现在已准备出发”。故选D项。
4.(2000年春季高考)These wild flowers are so special I would do ___________ I can to save them.
A. whatever B. that C. which D. whichever
简析：选A。全句意为“这些野花如此奇特，我要尽我所能来挽救它们。”宾语从句“whatever I can (do)”中的do被省略了，而whatever作这个do的宾语。不选B。因为that引导宾语从句时本身不作成分。而C、D两项不合题意。句尾不定式“to save them”作目的状语。故选A。
5.(NMET 2000)-What about having a drink?
-___________.
A. Good idea B. Help yourself C. Go ahead, please D. Me, too
简析：选A。这是考查交际用语。“喝一杯怎么样？”A项是“好主意”表示赞同。B项“你自己动手(夹菜)吃吧。”是请他人用餐。C项“请继续吧。”是允许他人行事。D项是“我也要一杯吧。”表示自己也如此。故选A项。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
Unit 8 sports
1. stand for 代表
e.g. (1) P.O. stands for Post Office. 字母P.O.代表Post Office.
(2) P.R.C. stands for the People’s Republic of China. P.R.C.三个字母是中华人民共和国的缩写。
引申： Stand 站立，使直立（如stand the ladder against the wall）位于,矗立（An old oak tree once stood here.）；（用于否定，疑问句）忍受，经受 (I can’t stand his brother. 我受不了他的兄弟。) I can’t stand people interrupting all the time.我无法忍受老有人打岔）
Stand by 袖手旁观，待命， stand out 出色，杰出，显眼，突出
Four points stand out as being more important than the rest . 有四点比其余更重要。
She is the sort of person who stands out in a crowd. 她是那种在人群中很显眼的人。
2. would rather 宁愿
宁愿做某事 would rather do sth. prefer to do sth.
宁愿不做某事 would rather not do sth. prefer not to do sth.
宁愿做某事而不愿做（另外）某事
would rather do sth. than do sth. prefer doing sth. to doing sth.
3. every four years每四年
every 与数词或other，few等连用，表示时间或空间的间隔，其几个主要结构如下：
（1）every+基数词+复数名词
Take the medicine every six hours. 每隔6小时吃一次药。
（2）every+序数词+单数名词
He comes to see his uncle every third week. 他每三个星期来看望他叔叔一次。
（3）every +other+单数名词，“每隔一……”
Write on every other line.请隔行写。
（4）every +few+复数名词，“每隔几……”
Trees should be planted every few metres.
树应间隔几米种一棵。
4. compete v.竞争，比得上；比赛
compete in(a game，a match)参加compete with/against sb.和某人竞争compete for(a prize，a medal，the first place)角逐
词形变化：competition n.竞争；比赛，竞赛
competitor n.竞争者，竞争对手
5. .in modern times
time作“时代”解时，常用复数形式（times)。
in ancient times在古代 in modern times在现代
e.g. (1) Times have changed，and we shouldn’t fall behind them. 时代变了，我们不应落后于时代。
(2) She didn’t understand the spirit of the times. 她不理解那个时代的精神。
time作“时代”时，也可用单数形式。
in Shakespeare’s time(在莎士比亚时代)
6. rank vt, vi 1）分类；分等级 2）整齐排列
This town ranks high among beauty spots. 这城市在风景区中享有盛名。
cups ranked neatly on the shelf 杯子整齐地排列在架子上
n 1）等级 the rank of general 将军衔2）社会地位 3）列；排；行列
people of all ranks 各阶层人民
a taxi rank 一列出租车
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
7. 词语辨析
(一)game, match, contest, competition
(1)game“游戏，比赛，运动”，可指户内、户外、脑力、体力均可，指球赛时多用于美国英语。棋类、桥牌等比赛中多用game。复数可指运动会。
e. g. Let’s play a game of chess. 咱们来下盘棋吧！
Football is a game that does not interest me. 足球是我不感兴趣的一种运动。
Olympic Games/Asian Games奥运会/亚运会
(2)match“比赛、竞赛”，指球赛多用于英国英语。
它一般指预先安排好的正式比赛，摔跤、拳击等比赛中多用match。
e. g. They won the match. 他们赢得了比赛。
They played a football match against another school. 他们与另一所学校进行了一场足球赛。
(3)contest表示各种智力和知识“竞赛”，在这方面可与competition互换。
e. g. Mary won the speech contest. 玛丽在演讲赛中获胜。
She took the second place in the beauty contest. 她在选美赛中得了第二名。
(4)competition指通过个人的体力、智力、技能等竞赛而获取名次的各种比赛，也可指体力，也可指其他技能方面的。
e. g. They were in competition with each other for the prize. 他们为了得奖互相竞赛。
(二)sports, game, exercise
这三个名词都有“运动”的意思，但其含义及用法有所区别。
(1)sport指各种运动或户外消遣。如：篮球、足球、田径赛、游泳、打猎、爬山、赛车等。是各种竞赛或娱乐的总称。指娱乐性或锻炼性的体育活动时，一般作不可数名词，指竞赛性的体育活动或特指某种运动项目时是可数名词。复数时，指运动会或泛指体育运动。
e. g. He was fond of all kinds of sports, especially badminton. 他喜欢各种运动，特别是羽毛球。
Hockey, volleyball, football and tennis are all sports. 曲棍球、排球、足球和网球都是体育项目。
The school sports were put off. 学校运动会延期了。
(1)game“运动、游戏、比赛”，其含义及用法参看1中的有关game讲解。再如：
Children play games-tag, marbles, hide-and-seek and many others. 孩子们玩捉人、弹球、捉迷藏和许多其他的游戏。
We watched the football match/game on TV. 我们在电视上看了足球比赛。
How won the first two games but lost the third. 他胜了前两局，但第三局输了。(指比赛的局时，不能用match)
(3)exercise表示“运动、锻炼”，特别指保持健康的运动。用于指体育运动时是不可数名词，指某种活动锻炼，体操时是可数名词(常用复数)。
e. g. Walking, running, rowing and horse riding are all healthy forms of exercise. 散步、跑步、划船和赛马都是有益健康的运动。
Every morning, we see many old people doing morning exercises. 每天早上我们看见许多老人在做早操。
(三)beat, defeat, win, earn
1)beat, defeat都表示在战斗中或竞赛中“战胜、打败(对手)”，后接竞争对手，可以互换。
e. g. beat the competitor/the country/the team…打败对手/国家/那个队……
I can beat/defeat you at swimming. 我游泳比得过你。
He was defeated/beaten at chess. 他棋下输了。
2)win“战胜、赢得”，其宾语通常是比赛、战争、奖品或表尊重、崇拜之类意义的词。竞争对手不能作其宾语。
By her hard work, she won herself a place on the school team. 在刻苦训练下，她在校队里赢得了地位。
Our team won the game. 我们队获胜了。
His poem won the first prize of ten dollars. 他的诗获得了10美元的一等奖。
(3)earn“赢得，挣得”，表示通过工作等获得钱财和利益或经过努力获得地位和荣誉等。
He earned 100 dollars a day. 他一天挣100美元。
He earned the admiration of the world by his working hard for the world peace. 他为世界和平努力工作，博得了全世界的赞誉。
(四)gold, golden
(1)gold作名词“黄金”，形容词“金质的，黄金的”。
e. g. All that glitters is not gold. 发光的未必都是金子。
In Barcelona the Chinese team got 16 gold medals. 在巴塞罗那，中国队获得了16块金牌。
(2)golden是形容词“金黄色的，黄金般的”。
e. g. The child has blue eyes and golden hair. 那孩子长着碧眼金发。
Good health can make old age the golden years of your life. 健康能使老年成为你生命中的黄金年华。
(五)join, take part in, attend, join in, join sb. in sth.
(1)join“参加”指加入党派、社会、团体等并成为其中一员。
e. g. He joined the Party in 1980. 他是1980年入党的。
Many of them have joined the army. 他们很多人都参军了。
(2)join in表示“参加某种活动”，in可为介词，可为副词。作介词时，此短语可用join代替。
Eight million people joined in the battle against drought. 800万人参加了抗旱斗争。
They danced and danced until a lot of us joined in. 他们不停地跳着舞，直到我们中间有许多人都参加了进去。
(3)join sb. in sth. /doing sth. 表示“参加某人所从事的活动”。
Come and join us in the game. 来和我们一起做游戏吧。
All the family join me in wishing you a happy future. 全家人和我一道祝你将来幸福。
(4)take part in指“参加群众性活动、会议”等多用于正式场合，比join郑重。
We all take an active part in extracurricular activities. 我们都积极参加课外活动。
I took part in the game. 我们参加了比赛。
(5)attend “参加”着重指“到场，出席(会议、典礼、仪式等)”。
She is sure to attend the wedding. 她一定会去参加婚礼。
He decided to attend the meeting himself. 他决定亲自赴会。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
四、能力训练
(一)单句改错
1. I prefer doing to talk.
简析：talk改为talking。因“prefer+n. /doing to+n. /doing”为固定用法。
2. We often write an English competition every the other week.
简析：去掉the。因every other day(week, month, year…)中，other前不能带the，习惯表达。
3. Sport can keep us healthy.
简析：Sport改为Sports。因表示“娱乐、消遣”时，sport为不可数名词，指“运动项目、运动会，泛指体育运动”时，为可数名词，常用其复数形式。
4. This is the book in which I spent 25 yuan.
简析：in改为on。因spend…on sth. , spend…(in) doing为习惯搭配。
5. Would you like to join us for the game.
简析：for改为in，因join sb. in sth. 为固定搭配。
6. He has won a medal to his great success.
简析：to改为for，因表示“因……而获奖牌”，常用“win a medal for sth. 或receive a medal for sth. ”。
7. The five rings linked together also mean friendship or peace all over the world.
简析：or改为and。从意义上讲，friendship与peace为并列的递进关系，而不是选择关系。
8. The Olympic Games is held every four years.
简析：is改为are。因the Olympic Games作主语，谓语动词应用复数。
9. That was a very excited match.
简析：excited改为exciting。因-ed分词形容词表示内在的、自身的，-ing分词形容词表示外在的，令人/使人怎么样的。比赛应为“令人感到激动”。
五、高考真题
1. (NMET 1998)They ___________ the train until it disappeared in the distance.
A. saw B. watched C. noticed D. observed
简析：本题考查动词辨义，四个词均有“看”的意思，只有watch表示“集中注意力看”，题意为“他们看着火车，一直看到它消失在远处”。故应选B。
2. (上海2000)They’re not very good, but we like ___________.
A. anyway to play basketball with them B. to play basketball with them anyway
C. to play with them basketball anyway D. with them to play basketball anyway
简析：本题考查英语句子语序，to play basketball with them是不定式短语，作宾语，放在like之后，anyway作状语，放在宾语后，故应选B。
3. (上海)An accident happened at ___________ crossroads a few metres away from ___________ bank.
A. a; a B. /; a C. /; the D. the; /
简析：本题考查冠词用法，两空处均泛指，即“离一家银行几米远的一个十字路口”。故应选A。
4. (上海2000)The gentleman ___________ you told me yesterday proved to be a thief.
A. who B. about whom C. whom D. with whom
简析：tell sb. of/about sth. “向某人讲述某事”。本题考查“介词+关系代词”引导定语从句。故选B。
Unit 9 Technology
1. turn …inside out:里面翻到外面。彻底地。一般用作状语
He often wears his sweater inside out 他经常翻穿球衫
The new manager turned the old systems inside out. 经理对旧体制进行了彻底的改革。
2. I should be home in about ten minutes.
should 在本句中用来表示一种可能性，相当于 will probably 一般用于对事实的一种比较有把握的判断（多用在将来时）。
例如： - When will I take my photos? 我什么时候取照片？
- It should be ready at 12 o'clock. 应该 12 点钟会好的。
The plane should be late for at least half an hour in such bad weather. 在这样糟的天气里，飞机应该可能会迟到至少半个小时。
He has worked on the book for seven days, he should have finished it now. 他弄这本书已有 7 天了，到现在为止应该已经完成了。
She should be here any minute. 她该马上就到。
Dinner should be ready by now. 此刻晚饭应该做好了。
in about ten minutes [用法]大约十分钟以后,主要用于将来时间
1. throughout，all over，all through 三者都有“遍及，贯穿”之意，但在用法上有所不同。
(1) (1)throughout作介词，接表示时间或地点的名词，意思是“在整个期间”“从一端至另一端”即“在整个地区”。
(2) The news spread throughout the country. 这个消息传遍了全国。
(3) It rained throughout the night. 雨下了整整一夜。
(4) throughout作副词，意思为“到处、全部、处处、始终、彻头彻尾”。
(5) The room is painted throughout. 这屋子全部油漆一新。
(6) The boy remained silent throughout. 那男孩始终保持沉默。
(7) (2)all over意为“在(遍及)……的各部分”，只接表示地点的名词。
(8) Computers will be used more and more in the future all over the world. 将来全世界要越来越多的使用电脑。
(9) The disease spread all over the country. 疾病在全国蔓延开了。
(10) all over作副词，意思为“到处都是、全部结束”。
(11) He is wet all over. 他浑身湿透了。
(12) The war was all over. 战争彻底结束了。
(13) (3)all through意思为“在整个……期间”，后面接表示时间的名词。
(14) e.g. Some cold-blooded animals hibernate all through the winter.
一些冷血动物整个冬天都冬眠。
2. add v.加；增加；加起来；又说，补充
If the tea is too strong，add some more hot water. 如果茶太浓，再加点开水。
May I add a point? 我可以补充一点意见吗？
(15) add to 增加add…to…加，往……添加……
(16) His illness added to the family’s trouble. 他的病给家里增加了负担。
(17) Will you add more sugar to your coffee? 你的咖啡要多加些糖吗？
(18) Three added to four is seven. 3加4等于7。
(19) add up合计，加起来
(20) These figures don’t add up right. 这些数字加起来不对。
(21) add up to总共有，总计达
His whole school education added up to no more than one year. 他所受的全部学校教育加起来不过一年。
3. remind v.使（人）想起，使记起，提醒
(22) remind sb.of/ about…使(人）想起……
(23) He reminds me of his father. 看到他使我想起他的父亲。
(24) remind sb.to do…使人想做……，提醒某人做……
(25) I reminded him to work hard.我提醒他要用功。
(26) Remind sb.that…使人想起，提醒，警告
(27) She reminded me that I hadn’t watered the flowers. 她提醒我还没有浇花。
(28) 4. in case of…在……情形时，万一……；如果
e.g. (1) In case of fire，call 119. 倘若有火灾，就打119电话。
(29) in case在……的情况下，万一……的话；以防，免得；
(30) in case后接从句时，从句中的谓语动词常用一般现在时态，偶尔也要should+v.
(31) In case anything important happens，please call me up. 万一发生什么重要的事情，请打电话给我。
(32) Take your umbrella，in case it should rain. 带伞去吧，以防下雨。
(33) in case还可作副词用，意为“以防万一，免得”。
(34) You’d better carry some money in case. 你最好带些钱，以防万一。
(35) in any case无论如何，反正，不管怎样
(36) In any case，do your best. 无论如何，要尽力而为。
(37) in no case绝不，在任何情形下都不
(38) In no case should you give up. 你绝不应该放弃。（放在句首时倒装）
in the case of介词短语，意为“就……来说”“至于……”。
(39) In the case of the forest program, we leave it for further discussion.
in all/most/particular cases 在任何/大多数/特殊情况下
in the present/the worst/this/that/possible case 在目前/最坏的/这种/那种/可能的情况下
(40) In the present case, what we should do is just waiting.
5. wh-ever的用法归纳
whatever, whichever, whoever, whomever可以引导名词性从句，也可以引导让步状语从句，引导让步状语从句时，可以换成no matter what/which/who/whom，位置可在主句前，也可在主句后。
Take whatever you want.(宾语从句) 你可以拿你想要的任何东西。
Whoever breaks the law should be punished.(主语从句) 不管谁违反了法律都应受到惩罚。
We will complete the work on time, no matter what happens.(状语从句) =Whatever happens, we will complete the work on time. 不管发生什么事，我们都将按时完成工作。
Whenever he goes abroad, he will buy presents for his sister. =No matter when he goes abroad,… 不论何时出国，他都为她的妹妹买些礼物。
注意：however还有“无论多么”的意思。如：
However cold it was, he wanted to go swimming. 不管天气多么冷，他都想去游泳。
6. take over 接管;接受
When he retired, his eldest son took over the farm. 他退休后,他的长子接管了农场.
Take 其他搭配：
took an interest； take action to do, take time, take your time,
take apart 拆开；take down 拆掉，拆除，写下；
take in 收留， 欺骗，蒙骗， （take sth in）吸收，改小，Take out 带某人出去，切除（身体一部分）；
He was homeless, so we took him in. 他无家可归，所以我们收留了他。
Don’t be taken in by his charm-he’s ruthless. 别被他迷人的风度骗了，其实他冷酷无情。
Fish take in oxygen through their gills. 鱼用鳃吸入氧气。
Take off 起飞，迅速流行，取消，脱掉
Take on 呈现，承担，接纳（乘客）
The chameleon can take on the colors of its background. 变色龙可以变成周围环境的颜色。
We’re not taking on any new clients at present. 我们目前不接受新客户。
Take up 占用时间，地方等；开始从事，继续（他人未完成的事）
The table takes up too much room. 桌子占太多地方。
I won’t take up any more of your time. 我不想再占用你们的时间了。
They’ve taken up golf.他们学起打高尔夫球来了。
He takes up his duties next week. 他下周就要履行职责。
She took up the story where Tim had left off. 她接着讲Tim 未讲完的故事。
7. They have to repair machines when they break down.
. break down 1) 破坏；拆散 2) 失败；破裂 3) 精神崩溃；失去控制 4)（机器）损坏 5) 起化学变化
Chemicals in the body break our food down into useful substances. 人体中的化学元素把食物分解成有用的物质。
The peace talks are said to have broken down. (喻)据说和谈破裂了。
Our truck broke down outside town. 我们的卡车在城外抛锚了。
The car broke down halfway to the destination.汽车在到达目的地的中途抛锚了。
He broke down and wept. 他不禁失声痛哭。
Food is broken down by chemicals. 化学物质引起食物转化
Break 其他搭配：break in 破门而入， 插话， break into 破门而入；break away from 脱离
break off 断开，折断； 中断，停顿；
The back section of the plane had broken off.飞机尾部脱落了。
He broke off in the middle of the sentence. 他一句话说了一半就不说了。
break out 爆发
break through 突破，冲破，战胜
Scientists think they are beginning to break through in the fight against cancer.
Demonstrators broke through the police cordon.示威群众冲破了警方的警戒线。
He had finally managed to break through her reserve.他终于设法消除了她的拘谨。
break up 粉碎，破碎，拆开，打散
The ship broke up on the rocks. 船触礁撞碎了。
Sentences can be broken up into clauses. 句子可以分成从句。
break up (with sb)绝交: She’s just broken up with her boyfriend.
7. come up with 提出;提供;想出;赶上
Scientists will have to come up with new methods of increasing the world s food supply.
科学家们必须为增加世界粮食供应提供新方法.
He walked so fast that I couldn’ t come up with him.
8. succeedvi. 成功 vt.接续;继承
He succeeded in getting the job. 他谋得了那份工作。
The millionaire s eldest son will succeed to his estate.这百万富翁的长子将继承他的产业。
The storm was succeeded by calm. 暴风雨后一片宁静。
9. in the future将来：未来 in future以后；今后＝for the future
Who knows what will happen in the future？谁知道将来会发生什么？
I will study hard in future．我今后要努力学习
6. (一)单句改错
1.Why not to come to our home for the party?
简析：去掉come前的to。Why not do sth.?是表示建议的常用句型，not后跟动词原形，也可用Why don’t you do sth.?
2.Swimming is a great fun.
简析：去掉a。fun是不可数名词，通常不与冠词a或the连用。
3.Computers can be used to doing a lot of things.
简析：将doing改为do。be used to表示被用来做某事，to是不定式符号，其后接动词原形。如果它表示“习惯于做某事”时，to则是介词，后接名词、代词、动名词。
4.She gave me a lot of valuable advices.
简析：advices改为advice。advice当建议、忠告讲时，是不可数名词。
5.The title boy didn’t dare crossing the street by himself.
简析：将crossing改为to cross。dare作行为动词，后接不定式作宾语。
6.Mr Green’s family are going to London on the holiday.
简析：on改为for。因“go to somewhere for the (one’s ) holiday”，表示“去某地度假”，固定搭配。
(二)易错题
1.The motorbike is so nice.I think it costs ___________ ten thousand yuan.
A. in the least B. at most C. no more than D. at least
简析：答案选D。根据题意，应用at least表示“至少值一万元”。
2.___________ we do must be in the interests of the people.
A. However B. No matter how C. Whatever D. No matter what
简析：选C。“No matter…”只能引导让步状语从句而whatever引导名词性从句也可引导让步状语从句。
3.His words remind me ___________ we did during the summer vacation?
A. that B. of that C. of what D. what
简析：选C。remind sb. of sth.意思为“使某人想起某事”。题中缺of的宾语，由what引导的宾语从句作of的宾语。并且what既作宾语从句的引导词，又作动词did的宾语。
4.He practised speaking English with the teacher and his classmates ___________ possible.
A. where B. whatever C. whenever D. whichever
简析：选C。本题意思是“每当可能的时候，他总会与老师及同学们一起练习讲英语”。whenever“无论何时”=no matter when，引导让步状语从句。本句中的“whenever possible”是whenever it is possible的省略形式。
5.Sometimes grass ___________ paper.
A. is used to making B. used to make C. is used to make D. used for making
简析：选C。因be used to do sth. 意为“被用于做某事”，本句还可写为：Sometimes grass is used for making paper。
6. There are _____ five people in my family. They are my grandparents, my parents and I.
A. as many B. more than C. not more than D. no more than
简析：选D。not more than意为“不足、少于”；not more than意为“仅仅，正好”；more than意为“超过，不仅仅”。
五、高考真题
1.(NMET 2000,6)-What about having a drink?
-___________.
A. Good idea B. Help yourself C. Go ahead, please D. Me, too
简析：选A。对别人的提议表示赞成，为Good idea或That’s a good idea。
2.(2000春招)John may phone tonight. I don’t want to go out ___________ he phones.
A. as long as B. in order that C. in case D. so that
简析：选C。题中A为“只要”，B为“为了”，C为“以防”，D为“结果”。根据句意应选C。
3.(NMET 2000)I don’t think I’ll need any money but I’ll bring some ___________.
A. at last B. in case C. once again D. in time
简析：选B。A为“最终”，B为“万一”，C“又一次”，D为“及时”。本题意为“我认为我不会需要钱的，但我还是带些以防万一”。
4. (NMET 2001,春招)A new cinema ___________ here. They hope to finish it next month.
A. will be built B. is built C. has been built D. is being built
简析：选D。从后面的提示看，这项工程还没有完工，故应是正在建设之中，而且是被动语态。
Unit 10 The world around us
1. cut down 砍倒，减少，降低，缩短
The little boy cut down the young tree with an axe.
The doctor told me to cut down on drinking.
Cut 其他搭配：
cut off 砍掉，切掉
引申：cut across/through 取捷径；走近路
cut back 剪枝；修剪 减少；缩小；削减
to cut back on industrial production 缩减工业生产
cut in 插嘴, 超车抢挡；（突然）插入
Don't cut in while I'm talking. 我说话时别插嘴。
to cut in on a queue 加塞儿
cut off 中断，切掉，砍掉，使与外界隔绝（be cut off from ）
cut out 剪下；删除；
to cut out smoking 戒烟
cut up 切碎 使受苦
Jean was really cut up when her husband left her. 在丈夫抛弃她之后，简痛苦极了。
2. die out 死绝；消失，消灭
That custom died out years ago. 那种风俗许多年前就消失了。
The lights died out suddenly. 灯突然熄灭了。
die of/from 因……而死
She died of cancer/old age. 她死于癌症（终享天年）。
die from overwork/a wound操劳过度（受伤）而死
die away(声音、光线、风等)渐弱，渐息
The sound of their laughter died away. 她们的笑声渐渐消失了。
Die down 逐渐变弱，逐渐平息
The flames finally died down. 火焰越来越小，最后熄灭了。
die+名（形）死于……状态
die young/happy英年早逝（含笑九泉）
be dying for（口语）渴望……，很想……
He was dying for a drink. 他很渴望喝点酒。
3. adapt v. 使……适应，使……适合adapt oneself to适应…… adapt sth. to sth. 使…….适应……. adapted adj.适合……的；改编成……的
He couldn’t adapt his way of life to the company. 他的生活方式无法适应公司（的要求）。
He is quick to adapt(himself)to new circumstances. 他很会适应新环境。
The play is adapted from a novel. 这是一部由小说改编成的戏剧。
4. the other day，some day，one day，another day
(1)the other day“几天前”(a few days ago)指过去，只能用于过去时态。
The other day I met Mary in the street. 几天前，我在街上碰上玛丽了。
(2)some day“总有一天，某一天”指将来，通常只用于一般将来时或过去将来时，可与one day替换。
We are going to visit the museum some day/one day next week. 我们打算下周某一天去参观博物馆。
(3)one day“某一天，有一天”，可指过去的某一天，也可指将来的某一天(指将来的某一天可与some day互换。)
One day you will be punished. 总有一天你会受到惩罚的。
One day I saw a beggar walking along the street. 有一天我看见一个乞丐沿着大街行走。
(4)another day “改天”，指将来的一天。
I will see you again another day. 我改天会再来看你的。
5. devote vt.奉献
devote sth. / oneself to 致力于，把……奉献给
He has devoted his whole life to science.他把一生都奉献给了科学事业。
I don’t think it worthwhile to devote so much time to discussing the matter.
我认为花这么多时间来讨论这件事不值得。
形容词devoted 意思有两种
(41) 忠实的，慈爱的，恩爱的
(42) 献身……的，专心于……的，专用于…….的，热心的
e.g. a devoted son, mother, father
The newly married couple next door to us are devoted to sports.
The magazine is devoted to science.
6.
(一)单句改错
1. At the present, we don’t have any trouble in solving the problems.
简析：去掉第一个the, 或在present后加time。
at present是固定短语，意为“现在、目前”。也可用at the present time 来表示。
2. Too much of the deer in the country have been killed.
简析：将much改为many。too much后接的是不可数名词。too many后接可数名词。句中的deer是可数名词，其单复数同形。
3. The sun was disappeared behind the cloud.
简析：把was去掉。disappear表示“消失，失踪”，是不及物动词，不能用于被动语态。
4. Some day, I saw some foreign visitors in the park.
简析：把Some改为One。some day和one day都作“有一天”讲。但前者是指“将来有一天”，只能用于将来时态的句子中；后者既可用于“过去的某一天”，也可用于“将来的某一天”。
5. There used to have an old temple in the village.
简析：把have改为be。used to用于there be结构中，即There used to be…意为“过去有……”。
五、高考真题
1. (1999 上海)My parents always let me have my own ______ of living.
A. way B. method C. manner D. fashion
简析：答案为A。have one’s own way of doing sth. 是习惯用法，意为“有自己做某事的方法”。
2. (NMET 1998)-Can you come on Monday or Tuesday?
-I’m afraid ___________day is possible.
A. either B. neither C. some D. any
简析：答案为B。
前句提到Monday or Tuesday, 意为在两者之中选择，故可排除C、D两项。后文用I’m afraid…来回答，显然是否定含义，故选neither，意为两天都不可能。
3. ( 北京)All the people ___________ at the party were his supporters.
A. present B. thankful C. interested D. important
简析：答案为A。
由句意可知是“所有出席宴会的人都是他的支持者”，故只能选present。当“出席，在场”讲时，present作定语放在所修饰词后。
4. (NMET 2000)-Is John coming by train?
-He should, but he___________ not. He likes driving his car.
A. must B. can C. need D. may
简析：答案为D。must not意为“禁止，不许”；need not意为“不必”；can表推测多用于否定、疑问句中，但can not表“不可能”，与句意不符。只有may not表示“有可能”。
篇4：人教版 高三 复习：高一教材双单元知识点复习unit11-12
Unit 11 The Sound of The World
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
1. Practice. vi/vt 实践；练习practise doing sth 练习做某事
practice n. 练习;实践 eg. Practice makes perfect.（熟能生巧）put …into practice 付诸实践；
practical a. 实际的;实用的
practiced a. 熟练的;精通的
2. What do you have in mind？你心里在想什么？
have sth．／sb，in mind意为心中想着（某人／某事）’含 mind的短语有：chang one’s mind“改变主意”；be in one’s mind有……的想法、想念”；have／there is sth on one’s mind有……心事”；keep in mind记住：make up one’s mind“打定主意．read one’s mind“看出……的心事,知道……在想什么”；。out of sight,out of mind “眼不见为净”等.
mind还可作动词，意为“当心，介意，注意，照看”等 例如：
Mind your own business少管闲事
Mind your manners．Peter！彼得，注意礼貌！
3.辨析：other，another，others，the other，the others
（1）other意为“其他的”，数量不确定。常与some相对。如：
①When winter comes，some birds fly to the south；other birds stay．
冬天到来时，有些鸟儿飞去南方，其他的留下来。
②I’m busy now，please ask me about it some other time．
我现在正忙，请另找个时间问我此事的情况。
注意：other 修饰复数名词，可以换成others，如①中的other birds可以换成others
（2）the other用于修饰单数可数名词或修饰复数名词，也可修饰不可数名词，表示确定的数量。如：
③The other students in the class keep their eyes closed．班上其余的学生闭着眼睛。
④Show me the other hand．把另一只手拿给我看看。
注意：the other修饰单数可数名词,可单独使用，修饰复数名词，可以换成the others，但other本身不能单独使用
（3）another等于one other，表示不确定的另外一个，可以单独用，也可修饰名词，并且只能修饰可数名词。如：
③I don’t like this one，please show me another．我不喜欢这个，请给我拿另一个看看。
another也可修饰复数名词，意为“另外的”。如：
⑥There’s room for another few people in the back of the bus.这辆公共汽车的后边还能坐下几个人。
4. spread v. 传播;散布;使伸展 [注意]过去式,过去分词和原形相同
If I tell you the secret, don’ t spread it around. 如果我告诉你这个秘密，请不要传播。
The fire soon spread through the whole of the town. 火很快蔓延到整个城市。
I spread my arms as far apart as I could. 我尽可能地将双臂伸展开
Spread out 伸展身体，摊开，散开
There’s more room to spread out in first class. 在头等舱宽敞些，伸得开腿。
Do you have to spread yourself out all over the sofa? 你就非得躺下，把整个沙发占了才行吗？
The searchers spread out to cover the area faster. 搜索人员分散开来，好更快搜索这一地区。
Papers had been spread out on the desk. 各种报纸摊在桌上。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
5. universal a.全体的;普遍的;;众所周知的;宇宙的;全世界的;万能的,通用的;多才多艺的;博闻广见的
The government introduced universal secondary education years ago. 几年前,政府就倡导普及中等教育。
Football is a universal game. 足球是一项全球性的运动。
It is the universality of toys with regard to their development in all parts of the world and their persistence to the present that is amazing. 玩具在世界各地发展的一致性和它们持续到今天是令人惊奇的。
6. pick(v.)的用法
(1)摘、捡、拾
e.g. He picked her a rose. 他为她摘了朵玫瑰花。
The little birds were picking the grain. 小鸟在啄食粮食。
(2)挑选
Please pick a good book for me. 请为我选本好书。
(3)pick out选好、选出、认出、看清楚
Pick out those books that you’d like to read. 把你喜欢看的书选出来。
We could pick out different places in the city from the plane.我们能从飞机上把城里的各个地方认出来。
(4)pick up拾起，拿起(非正规地)学会，学到，取(某物)，接(某人)上车；听到，收听，用便宜的价钱买到
Please pick up all the pieces of paper. 请把所有的纸片都捡起来。
He picked up French while he was staying in Paris. 他在巴黎逗留期间学会了法语。
The bus stopped and picked up three people. 公共汽车停住，上来了三个人。
My radio can pick up VOA very clearly. 我的收音机听美国之音很清楚。
6. desire vt. (不用于进行时) 渴望，期望，想望 （desire to do ）
We all desire health and happiness. 我们都渴望健康和幸福。
Fewer people desire to live in the north of the country. 想住在这个国家北部的人就更少了。
Desire 引导从句：表示 “建议、请求、命令、要求” 等主观意向的词(如：suggest、advise、assume、decide、demand、desire、insist、propose、order、recommend、require、suggest...)，引导宾语从句时需用虚拟语气。虚拟语气中的格式很固定：谓语动词用should+动词原形，should可以省略。注意这种句型中的虚拟语气形式不受主句动词时态的影响。
n. 欲望，渴望（for sth, to do ）
7. entertain vt.1. 使欢乐,使娱乐 2. 招待,款待(+with/at/to) vi. 款待,请客
We were all entertained by his humorous stories. 他的幽默故事使我们大家都很开心。
They often entertained their friends at weekends. 他们常在周末招待朋友。
8. 绝大多数带宾语的及物动词都可以从主动语态变成被动语态。但在下列情况下则不能转换。
(1)受动词的限制
表示状态的及物动词。这类动词有：hold(容纳)，own(拥有)，owe(归属)，suit(适合)，contain(包括)，cost(花费)，lack(缺少)，love(爱)，hate(恨)，have(有)，last(持续)等。不能转换成被动语态。
e.g. We have a new house. 我们有座新房子。
The great hall holds 2 000 people. 这个大厅能容纳2 000人。
The paper will last me a whole term. 这纸够我一学期用。
have表示“吃(饭)”“患(病)”“明白”“知道”等意思时，没有被动语态。
e.g. She had no English. 她不懂英语。
Have you had your lunch?
你吃过午饭了吗？
谓语部分有表示主语“能力”的can，或有表示主语“意愿”的will，would，would rather，dare等时，不能转换成被动结构。
e.g. I can speak English. 我会说英语。
John will marry Rose. 约翰将与罗丝结婚。
be，become，turn，get，go，fall，look，sound等系动词后面的各词是表语，也不能转换成被动语态。
e.g. His dream has become a reality. 他的梦想已经实现。
He has turned scientist. 他已成为科学家。
一些由及物动词与各词构成的不可分割的短语动词，也不能变成被动语态。
e.g. Great changes have taken place since liberation.
解放以来发生了巨大的变化。
We should not lose heart，but make another try.
我们不应灰心，而应再试一次。
He often makes faces in class.
他常在课堂上扮鬼脸。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
(2)受宾语的限制
含有下列情况的宾语时，主动语态不能转换成被动语态。
表示地点、处所的名词作宾语时，常见的动词有：leave，enter，reach，join等。
e.g. He reached Beijing at 6 o’clock. 他在六点钟到达北京。
He entered the office. 他走进了办公室。
Her brother joined the army two years ago. 她哥哥两年前参的军。
She swam across the river. 她游过了河。
同源名词作宾语，常见的动词有die，sleep，smile，laugh，fight，live等。
e.g. We are living a happy life. 我们过着愉快的生活。
I dreamed a wonderful dream. 我做了一个美梦。
有些抽象名词作宾语。
e.g. He lost interest in English. 他对英语失去了兴趣。
反身代词、相互代词、动词不定式、动名词作宾语时。
e.g. She killed herself in . 她自杀的。
We should help each other. 我们应该互相帮助。
I want to watch TV every day. 我想每天看电视。
John enjoys singing. 约翰喜欢唱歌。
宾语前带有指代主语的物主代词。
e.g. The doctor shook his head. 大夫摇了摇头。
宾语常是表示“度量”的名词。
e.g. We walked two miles. 我们走了两英里。
cost，wish，promise等带双宾语时。
e.g. It costs me much time. 它花了我很多时间。
He promised us to come. 他答应我们要来。
love，like，want，wish，get，cause等带复合宾语时。
e.g. Do you really wish him to go? 你真的希望他去？
He has to get someone to help him. 他必须让某个人来帮助他。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
五、高考真题
1.( 上海)The new suspension bridge(吊桥)___________by the end of last month.
A. has been designed B. had been designed C. was designed D. would be designed
简析：选B。本题由时间状语by the end of last month可以确定用过去完成时，再由design动作的承受者suspension bridge作主语可以确定用被动语态。
2.(NMET )I’ve worked with children before, so I know what____ in my new job.
A. expected B. to expect C. to be expecting D. expects
简析：选B。know learn, decide等后边常跟“wh-+to do”的结构，相当于wh-词引出的宾语从句。此处不强调进行，排除C。B项相当于“so I know I should expect what in my new job.”,expect的主语应该是“人(工)”。若用A、D两项的动词作what从句的谓语动词，它的主语则不是“人”而是“物(what)”。因此句型结构错误。
3.(2001 春)If this dictionary is not yours, ___________can it be?
A. what else B. who else C. which else’s D. who else’s
简析：选D。“……它还可能是别的什么人的呢？”此处是说字典的拥有者，与“人”有关，排除A、C两项。主语“it”指字典，表语不可能是“人”，排除B，而是“某人的”，故D正确。注意：属格的符号“‘”，要加在else上。
4.(2001 春)Hundreds of jobs ___________if the factory closes.
A. lose B. will be lost C. are lost D. will lose
简析：选B。从句意看是对将来的假设，if条件从句中是(用一般现在时“closes”代替)一般将来时，主句“结果”也应是将来的时态，排除A、C两项。job和lose应为被动关系，排除D项。
Unit 12. Art and Literature
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
1. Make 的用法
(一)make+宾语+宾补
make一词可搭配的宾语补足语有以下几种情况：
(1)make+adj.+n./adj.
We have made him our monitor. 我们推选他为班长。
The news of her death made us sad. 她死亡的消息使我们悲伤。
当宾语是不定式短语或从句时，多用it作形式宾语。
I made it a condition that everybody must be present. 我提出条件，人人都要出席。
That made it impossible for us to go on. 这使我们没法进行下去。
(2)make+adj.+do sth.
They made me retell the story. 他们要我重讲一遍这个故事。
注意：在被动结构中，不定式要带“to”。
I was made to retell the story.
(3)make+adj.+v.-ed
The strange noise made the child frightened. 奇怪的声音使孩子感到恐惧。
通常情况下，make后的宾语是反身代词时，作宾语的动词要用过去分词，即：
make oneself+v.-ed(heard,known,understood)
He spoke so loud as to make himself heard. 他大声地说以便能让人听清楚。
Will you please make yourself known to us in English? 你能用英语给我们作一下自我介绍吗？
但有时，视句意也可用其他形式。
The little child stood on the chair to make himself look taller. 那个小孩站在椅子上，使他看上去更高些。
2. power n. 能力，力量；政权；权利
Knowledge is power. 知识就是力量.
The leader has the power to make a decision. 领导有做决定的权利。
A new power station has been built. 这儿新建了一座发电站.
短语：take power/come into power上台，开始执政 out of/beyond one’s power能力所不及 power politics 强权政治
可数名词，“强国，有影响的人或事” the Western Powers 西方列强
3．trick n. 可数名词，“诡计，计谋” play a trick on sb 捉弄某人
He got the money from me by a trick.
vt. trick sb into doing sth “用计诱使某人做某事”
She tricked him into marrying her.
4．series n.“系列，连续”，单复数相同 a series of “一系列”
a series of school textbooks 一套教科书 television series 电视连续剧 in series 连续地，顺序地
5. treat vt 1) 对待 treat ……as/like “把当作/像一样对待”
e.g. They treated me as one of the family.
2) 治疗 treat a disease/sb “治病/为某人治疗”
e.g. The doctors were not able to treat this disease.
3) 款待，请客， 常用于 treat sb to (sth)这一结构，表示“以某物款待某人” be one’s treat 由（该）某人请客
We will treat you to dinner. 我们请你吃饭
6. in trouble 处于困境中，有麻烦
You’d better ask for leave, or you may be in trouble. 你最好还是去请假，否则你可能有麻烦.
与trouble 相关的常用搭配：
have trouble (in) doing sth 做某事有麻烦 get into/out of trouble 陷入/摆脱困境
7. habit n.习惯，习性. 常可以构成以下短语：
be in/ form/develop/have a habit of doing sth 有（养成）做…….的习惯
get/fall into the habit of 染上……的习惯 out of habit 出于习惯
I only do it out of habit. 我只是出于习惯。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
8. shoulder n.肩膀 vt.肩负,承当
She shouldn’t shoulder all the blame for the mistake.
[习语] shoulder to shoulder 肩并肩 give sb the cold shoulder 以冷淡态度对待某人
9. with a scar on his forehead 是with的复合宾语结构，宾语补足语除介词短语外，还有形容词,副词,过去分词,不定式,---ing等.
e.g. The boy was sleepy soundly, with a smile on his face.
他被绑着双手带进来. He was brought in, with his hands tied behind him.
With a lot of difficult problem to settle the newly-elected president is having a hard time.
10. as if“好像，仿佛”，引导表语从句或方式状语从句，有时还可以接不定式.引导方式状语从句时，从句谓语常用虚拟语气.
e.g. He talked as if he had been to Beijing. 他说话好象去过北京。
It looks as if the suit was made by her mother. 看起来这件衣服是她的妈妈做的。
He opened his mouth as if to say something. 他张开口好象要说什么。
He acts as if(he was)a fool. 他做事像个傻子。
She left the room hurriedly as if(she was) angry. 她匆忙离开房间好像生气的样子。
When a pencil is partly in a glass of water, it looks as if it were broken. 当铅笔一部分在水里时，看起来象折了一样。
11. if only 在文中表示“但愿，要是…..就好了”，是对前面所述情况的一种假设，句子多用虚拟语气；
It’s a wonderful job. If only I could do it. 这工作棒极了，要是我能做就好了.
Look at the trouble I am in！If only I had followed your advice. 看看我现在的麻烦！我要是早听你的建议就好了。
[知识拓展] 1).only if 表示“只有…..才”, 强调条件实现的依据.
You will be able to speak English well only if you practice constantly.
2).as long as “只要”具有很强的时间延续性，从句的动词常为延续性动词.
You may borrow the book as long as you keep it clean.
12. 1.They were about to steal into the house while a few policemen came up.
简析：将while改为when。表示“正准备做某事，突然……”时，连词要用when。此时when相当于and at that time;and then,不可用while。因为while用作并列连词时，表示转折和对比之意。
2.His teacher loves him very much as if she is his mother.
答案：将is改为were。当as if引导的从句表示一种不真实的情况时，谓语动词需用虚拟语气，表示与现在事实相反时，要用过去式，be动词不论第几人称，均用were。
3.Nothing which you do will make any difference.
答案：去掉which或将which改为that。先行词是不定代词时，关系代词只能用that,不能用which,作宾语时，关系代词可以省略。
4.He is the only one of the teachers who know French in our school.
答案：应将know改为knows。因为one前有the only修饰，one 指代名词单数teacher,而不是复数名词the teachers。
5.Tom made rapid progress at school, as pleased his parents a lot.
答案：将as改为which。as和which都能引导一个先行词是整个主句内容的非限制性定语从句。as有词义，可译为“正如……”，which无词义，只代表主句的意思，可译为“这件事”“这一点”。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
五、高考真题
1.(NMET 2000)Someone called me up in the middle of the night, but he hung up _________I could answer the phone.
A. as B. since AC. until A D. before
简析：答案为D。before用作连词时，表示时间，意思是“在……之前”，但在实际应用中，要看语境，其译法非常灵活。此句应译为：“有人在半夜给我打了电话，可是我还未来得及接电话他就挂断了。”
2. (NMET 2001)___________is known to everybody, the moon travels round the earth once every month.
A. It B. As C. That D. What
简析：答案为B。as和which均可引导非限制性定语从句，代替整个主句，但as引出的从句可放在句首、句中或句末，而which引出的从句通常只能放在主句后面。
3. (2000上海)Recently I bought a Chinese vase, ___________was very reasonable.
A. which B. the price of which C. its price D. the price of whose
简析：答案为B。这是考查非限制性定语从句的用法，the price of which=whose price,是指代前面的Chinese vase的一种所有格的变形。
4. (NMET 2000)Let Harry play with your toys as well, Clare-you must learn to______.
A. support B. care C. spare D. share
简析：答案为D。share意为“共同分享”，合乎语境。
5. (NMET 1999)Carol said the work would be done by October, ________personally I doubt very much.
A. it B. that C. when D. which
简析：答案为D。本题考查定语从句中关系代词的用法，也涉及到了人称代词(it)，指示代词(that)和关系副词(when)。此题为一包含非限制性定语从句的复合句，which引导定语从句，代替整个主句的内容。
篇5：人教版 高三 复习：高一教材双单元知识点复习unit3-4
Unit 3 Going places
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
1. means n.手段；方法
The quickest means of travel is by plane. 最快的交通工具是飞机。
All the possible means have been tried. 已采取了所有的手段。
注意：means单复数同形，由句意判断means的单数、复数形式。
搭配by means of 应用；使用
We expressed our thoughts by means of words. 我们用词句来表达思想。
They made their fortune by means of working hard. 他们靠勤劳发家致富。
2. consider是高考常考动词之一，其主要用法可归纳为两点：
(1)考虑 consider+n./pron./doing consider+clause consider+wh-+to do sth.
e.g. Tom said he would consider the problem. 汤姆说他会考虑这个问题的。
He is considering changing his job. 他在考虑调换一下工作。
He considered how he should answer. 他考虑应当如何回答。
They considered what to do next. 他们考虑下一步该怎么办。
(2)把……看作；认为
consider+that clause consider sb.+(to be)+n./adj.
e.g. They considered that he had made a great mistake. 他们认为他犯了一个大错误。
We don’t consider Tom to be our best friend. 我们并不把汤姆当成我们最好的朋友。
They considered themselves very important. 他们自以为非常重要。
3. experience n.&v. 作名词“经验”(多作不可数名词)
Experience is the mother of wisdom. 经验是智慧之母。
I have no experience of/in teaching. 我没有教学经验。
间或作可数名词，表示某种经验, 经历，经历，经过的事。
e.g. Every experience is of value. 每一份经验都是宝贵的。
I shall never forget the first night’s experience. 我将永远不会忘记第一个晚上经历过的事。
作动词“经历、感受、感到”
For the first time, we experienced defeat. 我们第一次感受到了失败。
4. get away from 摆脱，逃离，受到从轻发落
I won’t b able to get away from the office before 7 o’clock. 我7点前无法离开办公室。
He was lucky to get away with only a fine. 他算是万幸，只被罚款了事。
5. watch out （for）注意；留心
Watch out! There is a car coming. 小心！汽车来了。
Watch out for the hole in the road. 留神路上的那个坑。
The staff were asked to watch out for forged banknotes. 已经要求职员留意伪钞。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
6. as with prep.如同...的情况一样,如同...一样， 就。。。而言
As with drawing a picture, you should be patient and careful in doing this job. 正如画画一样，在做这件事时，你应该耐心细致。
As with the origins of many other events no definite conclusions can be drawn. 就象许多其他事件的根源一样，做不出什么结论。
As with other professionals, they must learn and relearn throughout their professional lives if they are to keep pace with modern trends and changing needs. 就象其他专业人士一样，他们必须在职业生涯里终生学习，再学习，如果他们要赶上现代的潮流和不断变化的需要。
As to (used to start talking about sb/sth) 对于，至于
As for Jo, she’s doing fine. 至于乔，她现在过得不错。
As for food for the party, that’s all being taken care of. 关于聚会要用的食物，正在置办当中。
as to sth | as regards sth （used when you are referring to sth）:
As to tax, that will be deducted from your salary. 至于税，它会从工资里扣除。
7. see sb. off 为某人送行
He is going to the railway station to see his friend off. 他去火车站为他的朋友送行。
引申：see about 考虑，照料，安排 ，see for yourself 亲自看，亲自了解；
see into 调查……; seeing that 鉴于 （Seeing that he’s been off sick all week he’s unlikely to come. 他请病假一周了，所以他今天也不大可能来。）see
see through 透过……看见，看穿……,坚持完成，进行到底， see to sth 办理，照管；料理 （see to it that …）
8. trip, journey, travel, tour, voyage 区别
trip：短距离旅行或出差 travel：旅行（长途）tour,为了玩 journey：所有的旅行，偏重于陆地旅行 voyage：旅行（海上） flight：空中飞行
trip, journey搭配的动词有make, take和go on。如：
make/take/go on a trip/journey to Europe到欧洲旅行
on a/one’s trip/journey; on a short/long pleasant trip/journey
Have a pleasant trip. 祝旅行愉快。
The journey to the seaside will take not more than two days. 到海边去旅行最多需要花两天时间。
I at once began making preparations for a trip home. 我马上开始为回家的旅途做准备。
9. holiday, vacation, leave
Vacation 假期，休假 （常不用复数）；holiday 假日，可以说a holiday 或holidays , leave 指雇员有理由而获准的休假。
We're going to France during the summer holidays（vacation）.暑假期间我们将去法国。
on holiday（=on vacation）度假； take a holiday（= take a vacation）休假
ask for sick leave 请病假
10. 现在进行时用法归纳(六种用法)
1.表示现在进行的动作有两种含义：
(1)表示说话的时刻正在进行的动作，常与时间状语now, at this moment等连用。(2)表示现阶段正在进行的动作，而不一定是说话时正在进行的动作，常与表示现阶段意义的时间状语now(目前)，today, this week, this term, this year等连用。
e.g. Right now it is the summer vacation and I am helping my dad on the farm.
现在正是暑假，我在农场帮我爸爸干活儿。
I’m sitting on a rock near the river with my friends.
我和我的朋友们正坐在河边的一块岩石上。
2.表示按计划或安排将要发生的动作，一般不会变动，若用一般现在时，固定不变的意味更强。能这样用的动词多是come, go, leave, arrive等之类的动作动词。现代英语中这种用法有扩大的趋势，几乎表示计划或安排将要发生的动作都可以用这种形式。通常这种句子都带有表示将来的时间状语。
e.g. My train is leaving at 6:25 tomorrow morning.(=My train leaves at 6:25 tomorrow morning.)
我要坐的火车明天早上六点二十五分开。
3.用于时间状语从句或条件状语从句表示将来的动作，强调动作的持续进行。
e.g. When you are riding a bike along the street don’t forget the traffic light.
你沿着大街骑自行车的时候，别忘了看交通灯。
4.表示经常性的习惯性动作，常和副词always, constantly, continually等连用，表示说话人的赞叹、满意、讨厌、不耐烦等语气，用一般现在时只是一般的平铺直叙，表达不出这种感情色彩。试比较：
We are living happily. 我们现在日子过得很幸福。(带有满意的色彩)
We live happily.(一般地说明)
She is always working hard like that. 她总是那样勤奋地工作。(赞扬语气)
She always works hard. 她一向工作努力。(说明情况)
5.表示要求、愿望的动词(如want, hope, wish, wonder等)用现在进行时，表示与对方说话时态度礼貌，显得委婉、客气，这种用法没有动作进行的意味。
e.g. I’m hoping you’ll give me some advice. 我希望你给我一些建议。
I’m wondering if you have time to help me with my English. 我不知道你是否有时间帮我学英语。
当表示某一时刻的感受时，be, feel, like, look forward to等在口语中常用进行时，含有进行的意味。
e.g. The child is being naughty today. 这孩子今天在淘气。(暗含这孩子平时不淘气)
How are you feeling now? 你现在感觉如何？
6.表示刚过去的时间内发生的动作，这一用法不如用一般过去时或现在完成时的语气强。
e.g. I don’t know what you are talking about. 我不知道你刚刚说的是什么？
I don’t know what you said(have said). 我不明白你说的话。
Sorry, I wasn’t listening.
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
现在进行时专练
1. The volleyball match will be put off if it___________.
A. will rain B. rains C. rained D. is raining
简析：选B。主句用一般将来时，条件状语从句通常用一般现在时，若在rain后加上时间状语，如until 10或before 10,从句就须用现在进行时表示将来时间或进行的动作。
2. I don’t really work here. I ___________ until the new secretary arrives.
A. just help out B. have just helped out C. am just helping out D. will just help out
简析：选C。从前句句意判断，后一句的意思是“我正在这儿帮忙直到新秘书来”。
3. Dear mother, I ___________ to hear from you soon.
A. hope B. am hoping C. hoping D. have hoped
简析：选B。从句意分析，可知说话人在给妈妈写信，用现在进行时表示盼望家信的急切心情。
4. I’ll call on some of my old teachers while I ___________ in Guiyang.
A. stay B. will stay C. would stay D. am staying
简析：选D。while引导时间状语从句，表示“在一段时间内”，其谓语动词是延续性动作，用进行时。这里用现在进行时表示将来时间在进行的动作。
5. Every time I come into his room, he ___________ the same book.
A. read B. was reading C. readed D. is reading
简析：选D。前文表示“每当我走进教室的那一刻”暗示后文“正在干什么”。
6. -I’m going to the states.
-How long ___________ you ___________in the states?
A. are; stayed B. are; staying C. have; stayed D. did; stay
简析：选B。用现在进行时表示将来计划。
五、高考真题
1. (NMET )-Hey,look where you are going?
-Oh,I’m terribly sorry. ___________.
A. I’m not noticing B. I wasn’t noticing C. I haven’t noticed D. I don’t notice
简析：选B。现在已经知道该往哪走了，不知道是刚才或过去的事，故排除A、C、D三项。
2. (NMET 2001春)I’ve won a holiday for two to Florida. I ___________ my mum.
A. am taking B. have taken C. take D. will have taken
简析：选A。用现在进行时表将来，详见知识归纳2的第二种情况。
3. (NMET )-I’m taking my driving test tomorrow.
-___________!
A. Cheers B. Good luck C. Come on D. Congratulation
简析：选B。得知对方要参加测试时，主动予以祝福。
4. (2002北京)-Excuse me,sir,Would you do me a favor?
-Of course,What is it?
-I ___________ if you could tell me how to fill out this form.
A. had wondered B. was wondering C. would wonder D. did wonder
简析：选B。动词wonder用现在进行时，表示与对方说话时态度礼貌，显得委婉、客气。
5. (2002北京)It was raining heavily. Little Mary felt cold, so she stood ___________ to her mother.
A. close B. closely C. closed D. closing
简析：选A。close to是固定短语，放在stand后作状语。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
Unit 4 unforgettable experiences
1. take place 和 happen 区别
take place 常指“(某事)按计划进行或按计划发生。”如： Great changes have taken place in china since. take place还有“举行”之意。如： The meeting will take place next Friday. 2.happen常指具体事件的发生，特别指那些偶然的或未能预见的“发生”。如： New things are happening all around us. happen还可表示“碰巧；恰好”之意。如： It happened that I had no money on me.
2. advance v.前进；进展；n. 前进；进展
In advance“提前” advanced 是形容词，解释“高级的；先进的”。如advanced education高等教育
3. drag, pull, push
这三个词都有“拖，拉”之意，但有所不同。drag 的含义是“慢慢地而沉重的拽”，而且包含着被拖者进行着积极的或消极的阻抗或阻力；pull为通用词，常伴有状语表示拖的方向；push则表示“推；推动”。如： They are dragging a net in fishing.他们正在拖网捕鱼。He dragged behind the others. 他在别人后面慢吞吞地走着。 That tooth should be pulled out.那颗牙齿应该拔掉。 They pushed the door open. 他们把门推开。
2. hold on ( to) 抓紧，不放开
He held on to the back of the chair to stop himself. 他扶住椅子后背，以免摔倒。
引申：hold back 拦阻，阻挡，隐瞒，踌躇，犹豫；hold off 延迟，推迟，战胜，克服 hold on 等着，坚持住，别挂断； hold out 维持，坚持，给予希望（Doctors hold out little hope of his recovering.）伸出（手）；hold up 举起，提出（作为榜样）；
3. shake vt. vi. 抖动，震动, 摇动; 颤动
The house shook when the earthquake started. 当地震发生时，房子震动了。
She was shaking with anger. 她气得发抖。
Shake the bottle before taking the medicine. 服药前摇匀。
His hands shook a little as he wrote. 他写的时候手有点发颤。
常用短语：shake hands with sb. , shake sb’s hand/shake sb. by the hand和某人握手
shake sb’s head摇头
4. strike一词的三种用法
(1)可用来作“(自然灾害、疾病等)袭击”解， hit也可用来表此意。
That area was struck(=hit)by a lightning. 那个地区遭受了大风暴的袭击。
(2)可作“打，击，敲，撞，咬”等多种意义解。
e. g. The father was so angry that he struck(=hit)the boy in the face. 父亲怒不可遏，打了孩子一个耳光。
The clock has just struck twelve. 时钟刚敲响十二点。
Strike while iron is hot. 趁热打铁。
His foot struck against a stone. 他的脚碰在一块石头上。
She was struck by a snake while walking in the grass. 她在草丛中行走时被蛇咬了一口。
(3)strike还可用来表示“给(某人)很深印象”“打动”(=impress)。
I was struck by what he said. 他的话深深地打动了我。
The first thing that strikes foreign visitors is the great number of bicycles in the streets. 首先给外国游客深刻印象的是街上自行车非常多。
5. fear 不管用作名词还是动词，基本上有两个含义，即“怕”或“担心”
n. 1) 害怕，恐惧 （for fear of/ that ）
He was shaking with fear. 他害怕得直发抖。
2) 担心；顾虑
There is no fear of his getting any injury.他不会受伤的。
vt, vi 惧怕，害怕, 担忧 (fear of 为。。。担心，担忧)
I fear that you'll be late if you don't go now. 如果你现在不走的话，我担心你会迟到。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
5. beat, hit, strike 和knock
1) beat指用力地打，痛打，跳动， 还可以表示“打败”， 如：
The landlord beat the farmhand heavily. 地主毒打长工。
The Iraq army was beaten. 伊拉克军队被打败了。
2）hit指击，袭击，打中，如：
An earthquake hit the district. 这地区受到地震的袭击。
One of the stones hit the window. 有一块石头打中了窗户。
3）strike通常指一下一下地打或敲击，留下印记等，如：
Strike while the iron is hot. 趁热打铁。
The clock is striking 12. 钟在敲12点。
4）knock指敲打并伴有响声。它还有“打倒、打翻”的意思，如：
Someone is knocking at the door. 有人敲门。
He knocked the girl down. 他把这女孩撞倒了。
6. noise, voice, sound
(1)noise 指各种“噪音”或“吵闹、嘈杂声”。
e. g. The noise of traffic kept him awake. 车马喧闹使他睡也睡不着。
Don’t make so much noise. 别那么吵闹。
(2)voice 指人的说话声、歌声或笑声。也可用以指鸟鸣或狗叫声及拟人的方法。
e. g. The boy shouted at the top of his voice. 那男孩高声叫喊。
Keep your voice down. 把声音放低些。
(3)sound 指任何用耳朵能听到的声音。
e. g. I heard a strange sound outside. 我听到外面有一种奇怪的声音。
Sound travels more slowly than light. 声波比光波传播得慢。
7. 定语从句易错题练习
1. This is the mountain village___________we visited the other day.
A. which B. in which C. where D. when
简析：选A。本题先行词the mountain village指的是物，且在从句中作visit的宾语，故用which。B、D两项在从句中作状语，不符合句子结构，D项要求先行词表时间在从句中充当时间状语，故不能选。
2. A child___________parents are dead is called an orphan.
A. which B. his C. whose D. with
简析：选C。在定语从句中，作定语的关系代词应用whose, whose既可指人，也可指物。“whose+从句”也可用“of which/whom+从句”短语代替。A项在定语从句中不能作定语；B、D两项不能作关系代词，故可排除。
3. Do you know the date___________Lincoln was born?
A. which B. when C. where D. that
简析：选B。本句中先行词the date在定语从句中是作时间状语的，故应选when，虽然有时由表时间的名词作先行词；定语从句可用关系代词which或that引导，但它一定不是作时间状语，而大多数情况是作宾语的。
4. She thought I was talking about her daughter, ___________, in fact, I was talking about my daughter.
A. whom B. where C. which D. while
简析：选D。从关键词in fact，可看出前后两个句子形成一种对比，表示的意思是：她认为我在讲她女儿，而实际上我在讲我的女儿。连词while可表对比。A、B、C三项引导定语从句，而后面的句子不是定语从句，故可排除。
5. Tom’s mother kept telling him that he should work harder, but___________didn’t help.
A. he B. which C. she D. it
简析：选D。本题考查并列句和定语从句的区别。在两个句子中，有but, and, or, so等作并列连词，它们连接两个分句构成并列句。人称代词，he和she不能代替前面提到的事。如用which, 则必须去掉but，因此只有D项it合适。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
五、高考真题
1. (上海 2000)The gentleman ___________you told me yesterday proved to be a thief.
A. who B. about whom C. whom D. with whom
简析：选B。因tell sb. of/about sth. “向某人讲述某事”，本题考查“介词+关系代词”引导定语从句。
2. (NMET 1999)___________him and then try to copy what he does.
A. Mind B. Glance at C. Stare at D. Watch
简析：选D。本题考查语境中动词的词义辨析。解答此类题应把全句要表达的信息与动词的准确含义综合考虑，去选择最佳答案。题干中copy意思为“模仿”，既然模仿，就得先观察，因此D项watch为最佳答案。而不选mind(照顾)，glance at(瞟一眼)或stare at(盯着)。
3. (上海2000)She found her calculator ___________she lost it.
A. where B. when C. in which D. that
简析：选A。此题考查连接副词引起一个地点状语从句的用法。此题注意不能选C。学生学完定语从句后，以为任何情况下，一个副词总能用“介词+which”来代替，其实，这一点必须是在定语从句中，而此题没有先行词，故只能是一个状语从句。
4. (NMET 2002)John shut everybody out of the kitchen___________he could prepare his grand surprise for the party.
A. which B. when C. so that D. as if
简析：选C。本题考查状语从句中关联词的使用，从句意上看，此处应是表示目的的状语从句。A、B、D三项不可引导目的状语从句，应排除。故选C项，so that意为“以便，为了”。
定语从句常见错误
1. 误 : I\\' ve read all the books which you lent me. 正 : I\\' ve read all the books that you lent me. 析：定语从句的先行词被all，some，any，no，little，few，much，very等修饰时，关系代词要用 that。 2.误: This is the last lesson which Mr Green taught us.正 : This is the last lesson that Mr Green taught us. 析：定语从句的先行词被序数词或形容词最高级修饰时，关系代词要用that。 3. 误: Is there anything else which I can do for you?正： Is there anything else that I can do for you? 析：定语从句的先行词是everything，anything，nothing等不定代词时，关系代词要that. 4. 误: They talked about the persons and things which they remembered in the old days. 正 : They talked about the persons and things that they remembered in the old days. 析：定语从句的先行词既有人又有物时，关系代词要用that。 5. 误 : My hometown is no longer the place which it used to be. 正: My hometown is no longer the place that it used to be. 析：定语从句中，关系代词充当从句的表语时，该关系代词要用that。 6. 误; Dinner starts with a small dish, that is often called a starter.正 : Dinner starts with a small dish, which is often called a starter. 析：关系代词that不能用于非限制性定语从句，但which可以。 7. 误: He lives in the room, the window of that faces the south.正 : He lives in the room, the window of which faces the south. 析：关系代词that不能用于“介词十关系代词”结构，但which可以。 B) who 和 whom 8. 误 : The man with who I worked has left.正: The man with whom I worked has left. 析：关系代词 who指人，作主语； whom也指人，但作宾语。在“介词十关系代词”结构中，先行词是人，关系词用whom；先行词是物，关系词用which 二、关系代词漏用 9. 误: The student is standing there is our monitor. 正: The student who/that is standing there is our monitor.正 : The student standing there is our monitor. f 析：定语从句中关系代词作主语时不能省略。这里也可以把定语从句改为现在分词形式作定语。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
三、关系代词与关系副词混淆 A) that/which 和 when 10. 误: Do you still remember the day when we first spent together? 正 : Do you still remember the day (that/which) we first spent together? 析：先行词是时间名词时，定语从句的引导词用关系代词还是关系副词“when”，取决于该先行词在从句中充当主语l宾语还是时间状语。这里先行词the day在从句中作宾语，关系代词可省略。 B) that/which 和 where 11. 误 : I\\' ll never forget the school where we visited last Monday. 正 : I\\' ll never forget the school (that/which) we visited last Monday. 析：先行词是地点名词时，定语从句的引导词用关系代词还是关系副词“where”，取决于该先行词在从句中充当主语l宾语还是地点状语。这里先行词 the school在从句中作宾语，关系代词可省略。 C) that/which 和 why 12.误 :Is this the reason why he gives for being late?正: Is this the reason (that/which) he gives for being late? 析：先行词是reason时，定语从句的引导词用关系代词还是关系副词“why”，取决于该先行词在从句中充当主语/宾语还是原因状语。这里先行词 the reason在从句中作宾语，关系代词可省略。 四、定语从句主谓不一致 13 误 : This is one of the rooms that is free now.正 : This is one of the rooms that are free now. 析：当定语从句的先行词是one of…结构时，先行词为of后的复数名词或代词，从句谓语用复数形式。 14.误: Professor Johnson is the only one of the experts who know a little Chinese. 正: Professor Johnson is the only one of the experts who knows a little Chinese. 析：当定语从句的先行词是the （only／very） one of…结构时，先行词为 one，从句谓语用单数形式。 五、定语从句重复用词 A）关系词与疑问词重复 15. 误: Who is the man who shook hands with you just now?正 : Who is the man that shook hands with you just now? 析：若主句以疑问词who开头，为了避免重复，定语从句的引导词要用that代替。 16.误: Which is the book which you want to borrow from me?正: Which is the book that you want to borrow from me? 析：若主句以疑问词which开头，为了避免重复，定语从句的引导词要用that代替。 B）关系词与被替换词重复 17. 误: This is the jacket which I bought it last month.正 ; This is the jacket which I bought last month. 析：关系代词Which已经在从句中充当宾语，it是多余的。 18. 误: Is this the museum where Jane has worked there for twenty years? 正: Is this the museum where Jane has worked for twenty years? 析：关系副词where已经在从句中充当地点状语，there是多余的。 六、定语从句介词错用 19.误. :Is this the CD player in which you spent 500 yuan?正 : Is this the CD player on which you spent 500 yuan ? 析：有时，需要根据从句谓语动词的习惯搭配来判断具体的介词。这里是 spent...on+名词”的搭配。 20. 误 : The baby of whom she takes good care is ten months old.正 : The baby whom she takes good care of is ten months old. 析：含有介词的短语动词一般不能拆开使用。又如 look after， care for， refer to等。
篇6：人教版高三复习：高一教材双单元知识点复习unit5-6
Unit 5 The silver screen
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
1. While still a student, she played roles in many plays.
当她还是一个学生时，就多次在话剧中扮演角色了。
While still a student 相当于While she was still a student.在英语中有些表示时间、条件、方式或让步等的从句有时可省略一些成分：如果从句的主语和从句的主语一致（或者是从句的主语是it），而且从句谓语中又包含be，那么这个主语和be动词都可以省略。例如：
Don’t talk while (you are) eating.
When (he was) asked how he gained first place, he suddenly became cheerful.
If (they are)operated by computer in the future, many of the trains will have no drivers.
Although (it was)sold by a German company for the first time in 1899, aspirin has been around much longer than that.
They looked around the room as if (they were) looking for something.
The boys will go out to play football whenever (it is) possible.
2. marry 用法
marry在大多数情况下是及物动词，（常用搭配：get/be married to sb , marry sb）
When did she get married? 她是什么时候结婚的？
在有副词修饰时，marry可作不及物动词用。
She married very early. 她结婚很早。
“和某人结婚”不能说“marry with sb.”, 应该说“marry to sb.”也可以不与介词搭配，将marry用作及物动词。
She married a doctor. or: She was married to a doctor. 她和一个医生结了婚。
3. degree n. 度，级； 程度； 学位
The summer months has an average temperature of more than 30 degrees centigrade.
夏天平均温度超过30度。
He has a high degree of ability.他能力很高。
He took his degree in physics at the university last
year.他去年在大学里获得了物理学位。
to a ……degree, to a degree that 到……程度, 在……程度上
I agree with you to some degree.在一定程度上我同意你。
4. speed n. 速度 with great speed以很快速度 /at top (full, low, safe, high, ordinary) speed以顶尖速度/ 以全速/ 以低速/ 以安全的速度/ 以高速/ 以一般的速度
at a speed of 100 kilometers an hour以每小时100公里的速度
如以某个东西的速度为参照, 则为: at the speed of, 用定冠词。如：
at the speed of sound以光的速度
2）v.快速地前进 过去式sped (常用搭配：speed up 加速)
He sped down the street. 他沿街快速前进。 The time sped quickly by.时间飞快地过去。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
5. keep构成的一些短语
keep(sb.)away(from sth.)(使)离开(某物) , keep sb.from doing sth.阻止某人做某事
keep sth.in mind记住某事, keep sb./sth. out(of sth.)不让……入内
keep back忍住(眼泪)，扣下，隐瞒, keep in touch with 与……保持联系
keep(on)doing sth.继续做某事, keep off远离，避开
keep up 保持(不低落)， 振作， （保持同一水平如：We are having difficulty keeping up
our mortgage payments. 我们难以继续偿还按揭贷款。）
keep up with 跟上，不落在后面
6. afford的用法 及物动词，其主要用法如下：
(1)“担负得起(……的费用、时间)”，常与can, could, be able to连用，表示“有足够的(时间、金钱等)条件(做某事)”。
afford +n./pron, . afford to do sth.
Now many people can’t afford the medical treatment in the country.
现在在农村许多人看不起病。
I can’t afford the time for it. 这时间我花不起。
We can’t afford to buy this new house. 我们买不起这新房子。
7. 关系副词when/where不能替代“介词+which”的场合归纳。
在定语从句中，when/where往往可以代替某些“介词+which”。
Tell me the time when/at which the train leaves. 告诉我火车发车的时间。
但在下列情况下，when/where不能代替“介词+which”。
(1)当since, until, after, before+which时，不能被when代替。
I met Jack in 1980, since which I have never seen him.
我是在1980年见过杰克的，自从那时以来再也没见他。
He came back at ten, until which we worked. 他十点钟回来的，直到那时我们还在劳动。
He went to school at 8, before which he read English.
他八点钟上学，这之前他读了英语。
(2)当on, behind, in front of, through, from, beside, around
+which时，不能被where代替。
I saw a desk on which was a book. 我看见一张桌子上有本书。
The house, in front of which there is a tree, is my home.
那所房子是我的家，其前有棵树。
This is the window through which the thief came in. 这就是贼从那进来的那个窗户。
8. by sea, by the sea, in the sea, on the sea
by sea “走海路，乘船”，用来表示交通方式，同by ship同义。
These heavy boxes should be sent by sea. 这些重箱子应由海路运送。
by the sea “在海边”，相当于on the coast。
There are many travelers by the sea. 海边有很多游客。
in the sea “在海里，在海水中”
There are many plants and animals in the sea. 海洋中有很多动植物。
(4)on the sea “在海上”，也有“在海边”的意思。
It was reported that many boats sailing on the sea had been lost.
据报道，在海上航行的很多船只失踪了。
9. take off 1)脱下(衣服等), 解(除)掉 2）（飞机）起飞 取消，停演， 迅速流行，突然大受欢迎
the new magazine has really taken off. 这份新杂志真是大受欢迎。
He took off his wet shoes.他脱下了湿鞋子。
The show was taken off because of poor audience. 该剧因为不卖座停演了。
The plane took off on time. It was a smooth take-off.飞机准时起飞。起飞非常顺利。
10. be afraid, be afraid to do sth., be afraid of(doing)sth.
(1)be afraid意为“担心，害怕”，多用于口语，常用来表示一种歉意，或遗憾，后可接so或that，也可接that从句。I’m
afraid(that) 其语意相当于I’m sorry, but…。
-Are we on time? 我们准时吗？ -I’m afraid not. 恐怕不准时。
-Are we late? 我们迟到了吗？-I’m afraid so. 恐怕迟到了。
(2)be afraid to do常表示“由于胆小而不敢做某事”。
She is afraid to be here alone. 她不敢单独呆在这里。
He is afraid to jump into the river from the bridge. 他不敢从桥上跳进河里。
(3)be afraid of(doing)sth.常表示“担心或害怕某事(发生)”。
He was afraid to walk across the one-logged bridge because he was
afraid of falling into the river. 他不敢过那个独木桥，因为他担心会掉进河水里。
I was afraid of hurting her feelings. 我担心伤害她的感情。
We are not afraid of difficulties. 我们不怕困难。
4) 给人不愉快的信息或不赞同某人意见时，用I’m afraid …
I’m afraid I’ve got bad news for you.
I’m afraid I can’t agree with you.
11. go wrong v. 走错路, 误入岐途, (机器等)发生故障
His friends helped him go wrong. 他的朋友把他带坏了。
Please correct my spelling If I go wrong. 如果我写错了，请纠正我的拼写。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
12. high与highly
(1)high既可用作形容词，也可用作副词，表示具体的“高的”“高地”之意。
The wall is two metres high. 这堵墙有两米高。
They were climbing a high mountain. 他们在爬一座高山。
Can you jump that high? 你能跳那么高吗？
The kite was flying high in the sky. 风筝在天空中高高地飞翔着。
(2)highly是副词，表示抽象的意思，“高地，高度地”。
He is a highly skilled worker. 他是一个高度熟练的技术工人。
The headmaster thought highly of our work. 校长高度评价了我们的工作。
13. owe vt. 1）欠(钱、物、债等)，后面通常接直接宾语和间接宾语，即owe sb sth 或owe sth to sb.
例如: I owe $20 to the tailor. 我欠裁缝二十美圆。
I owed John 60 dollars when I was in Paris.我在巴黎时，欠约翰60美圆。
2）应该……归功于……应当给予……
I owe it to you that I’m still alive. 我现在还活着，应该感谢你。
If I have improved in any way, I owe it all to my
teacher.如果说我有一些进步，这应该全部归功于我的老师。
I owe you many thanks.我非常感谢你。
We should do the duty which we owe to our country.我们应当对国家尽我们应尽的义务。
同义词：because of, thanks to, due to
14. After that it still took seven years before they finally got
married. 从那以后过了七年他们才结婚。
before……（以后）才。例如：
It was a long time before I got to sleep last night.昨天夜里过了好久我才睡着。
It will be four years before we meet again.四年以后我们才能再见面。
注意before的特殊用法：
1）不等．．．．．．就，
He went out before I had (had) a chance to tell him the good news.
我还没来得及告诉他这个消息他就已经出去了。
2）（不多久．．．．．．）就
We hadn’t waited long before the bus came.我们没等多久，公共汽车就来了。
It won’t be long before you get well again.不久你就可以恢复健康了。
3）宁愿．．．．．．，也不．．．．．．
He will die of hunger before he will steal 他宁愿饿死，也决不行窍。
15. look up 查询（如宾语为代词，则代词放中间）
Look up the word in the dictionary.在字典里查单词。
相关词组：look for 寻找；look after照顾，照料； look forward to期待；look into调查；
look on旁观；look out注意；look out for注意，留心，提防；look over翻阅，查看，检查；look
around环视；look through翻阅，查看。
16. stay away 不上班，不上学
17. run away from 从。。。逃走
18. determine to do , be determined to do 名词：determination
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
Unit 6. good manners
1. manner
(1)用作可数名词，意思是“方法”，“方式”，通常用单数形式。
I love duck cooked in Chinese manner. 我喜欢吃中国烧法的鸭子。
(2)用作可数名词，意思是“举止”，“态度”，常用单数形式。
I don't like his manner. It's too rude. 我不喜欢他的举止，太粗鲁了。
(3)用作复数形式，意思是“礼貌”，“规矩”。
It is bad manners to speak loudly in public. 在公共场合高声讲话是没礼貌的。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
2. none，no one，nothing
①none用于指人和物，可与of短语连用，用作单数和复数。
--“How many elephants did you see in the park?”
--“None．” -你在公园里看到几头大象? -一头也没看到。
②no one只能指人，不能与of连用，用作单数。
No one knows what they fought for． 没有人知道他们为什么发生战争。
③nothing用于指物，不与of连用，通常泛指“没有什么事情或东西”，用作单数。
Nothing can change the world． 什么也不能改变世界。
3. Custom, culture, habit，hobby 区别
[辨析]custom，habit，hobby
这三个词都有“习惯”的意思，但含义有一定的不同。
①custom通常指大范围、长时间形成的风俗和习惯。也可指生活习惯，后接不定式.
②habit habit指个人生活习惯、个人的习惯有好有坏，后接of doing，不可接不定式。“(有)养成……习惯”常用be
in/fall into/get into/form/have the habit of doing
sth.句型；“戒掉……习惯”常用give up/kick/break away from/get out of the habit
of doing sth.句型.
③hobby通常指“爱好”。
The Spring Festival is a custom in East Asia． 春节是东亚的一个风俗。
He formed a habit of getting up early． 他养成早起的习惯。
Reading is his hobby． 看书是他的爱好。
Culture 文化，文明（国家或群体的风俗，信仰，艺术，生活方式及社会组织）
4. impression
(1)通常用作可数名词，意思是“印象，感想”，
e．g．He made a strong impression on (upon)us．他给我们留下了深刻的印象。
(2)impression的动词是impress，意思是“留下印象”。常用短语impress sth. on
(upon)sb．“某事给某人留下印象”。
e．g．What he did was greatly impressed on(upon)us．他所做的一切给我们留下深深的印象。
The girl impressed her sense of humour on(upon)her
friends．这个女孩的幽默感给她的朋友留下深刻的印象。
5. at table意思是“就餐，吃饭”。at the(a)table表示“在桌子旁”。
You shouldn't speak loudly at table. 吃饭时你不该高声讲话。
He sat at the table，reading a novel． 他坐在桌子旁，看小说。
6. advice n. 忠告，劝告，建议
ask for one’s advice 征求某人的建议 give/offer sb. advice 给某人建议
take/follow one’s advice 接受某人的建议 some advice on/about… 有关……的建议（忠告）
advise v.劝告，建议（advise doing, advise sb to do ）
I advise that he should go at once.
我建议他马上去。 注：advise接从句时，从句中的谓语动词用虚拟语气，形式为“should+动词原形”，should可以省略。
7. When drinking to someone's health，you raise your glasses，but the
glasses should not touch． 在为某人健康干杯时，你举起杯子，但杯子不能碰撞。
(1)drink在此句中意思是“干杯”，通常与介词to连用。
Let's drink to the health of my teacher. 让我们为我的老师健康干杯。
(2)drink还有“饮，喝”，“举杯祝贺”的意思。
e．g．Let's drink beer together． 让我们一起喝啤酒。
They drank success to the professor． 他们举杯祝贺那位教授成功。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
8. raise，rise，lift
①raise用作及物动词，意思是“举起，抬起，抬高”，说明主语发出的动作是要作用于其它事物的。
②rise用作不及物动词，意思是“升起，上升，起立”，说明主语自身移向较高的位置。
③lift用力“举起”的含义。
Price has been raised up． 价格被提高了。
Price rises gradually． 价格渐渐地涨上去了。
The young lifted the stone at last． 那个年轻人终于举起那块石头。
9. follow用法归纳
(1)表示“跟随，马上就来”。
I’m sending the letter today，the packet will follow
later. 今天我先把信寄出，随后寄出包裹。
(2)表示“遵循，依照……行事”。
The villagers still follow the customs that are passed down from
their ancestors.
村民们还沿袭着祖先留下的风俗。
(3)表示“听懂，理解”。
As a beginner，she cannot follow the English Home Service quite well
on the radio.
作为初学者，她无法完全听懂广播《英语家庭服务》。
(4)表示“如下”。
He received a note which ran as follows:“ The meeting will be
delayed until next Monday.”
他收到一张便条，上面写着如下内容：“会议推迟到下星期一。”
10. sometimes，sometime，some time
①sometimes副词，表示“有时候，不时”。
Sometimes he is late for class． 他有时上课迟到。
②sometime副词，表示“曾经，某时，有朝一日”，常同过去时或将来时连用，表示过去或未来某一不肯定的时间。
It happened sometime 1ast year． 那是去年某一天发生的。
Will you come and see me sometime? 你哪一天来看看我好吗?
③some time名词词组，表示“一段时间”。
e．g．It will take me some time to read the novel． 读这本小说花了我一些时间。
There is some time left. 还剩一些时间。
11. leave out 省去，遗漏，不考虑
e．g．You can leave out their plan. 你们能够不考虑他们的计划。
You shouldn't leave out this important detail in the
trial．在审判中，你不该漏掉这个重要细节。
12. at this moment 在这时候； for a moment 片刻，一会儿；（at） any moment
任何时刻；马上；at the last moment 在紧要关头，在最后关头；at the moment 此刻；正当那时；暂时
for the moment 目前，暂时；in a moment 马上，立刻
the moment (that)一……就……
The moment he saw me，he turned pale. 他一看见我就脸色苍白。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
练习（unit 5）
19. 单句改错
1.The baby after whom she is looking is my little nephew.
简析：after应置于looking之后，短语动词look after不能拆开。
2.I saw all the apples which were on the table fall off into the
floor.
简析：应将which改为that。当先行词被all, any, few, little, no等词修饰时，关系代词应选用that,
不能用which。
3.The speaker raised his voice but still couldn’t make himself
hearing.
简析：应将hearing改为heard。make oneself heard意为“让别人听到自己的声音”。“make
oneself+过去分词”结构中，过去分词作宾语补足语，宾语oneself与宾补之间是被动关系。
4.This is the only bus which there is to the village.
简析：将“which”改为“that”。在这个句子中，that there is to the village是定语从句，是there
be句型，修饰其先行词bus。而且先行词bus被the only修饰。bus在定语从句中作主语，to the
village也作bus的定语。整个句子意为“这是惟一通往那个村庄的一辆汽车”。
20. 高考真题
1.(NMET )Cleaning women in big cities usually get ___________ by
the hour.
A. pay B. paying C. paid D. to pay
简析：选C。“按小时付报酬”与主语是被动关系，应选过去分词paid。类似的表达常见的还有：get burnt, get wounded,
get married等。
2. (NMET 1998)European football is played in 80 countries,
___________it the most popular sport in the world.
A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
简析：选A。本句意为“八十多个国家都踢欧式足球，这使其成为世界上最流行的运动”。此处应选现在分词作状语。此题可用排除法来考虑；不表目的，不用不定式，排除D；不是完整的句子，不用谓语动词，排除B。其后跟有宾语和宾语补足语，不可能是被动的，排除C。特别要注意make后接复合宾语这种句型。
3. ( 上海)He’s got himself into a dangerous situation
___________he is likely to lose control over the plane.
A. where B. which C. while D. why
简析：选A。此题考查定语从句中关系副词的用法。定语从句的先行词为situation，引导从句的词在定语从句中作状语，因此这个复合句中的定语从句应由关系副词where引导。
4. (NMET 2001春招)Would you slow down a bit, please? I can’t
___________you.
A. keep up with B. put up with C. make up to D. hold on to
简析：选A。此项中的短语keep up with含义为“跟上，赶上”，从上文的提示“让对方慢下来一点”，体会出是“跟不上对方”，故选A。
5. (NMET 2001)The film brought the hours back to me ___________I was
taken good care of in that far-away village.
A. until B. that C. when D. where
简析：选C。通过分析句子结构，可以看出这是一个包含定语从句的复合句。先行词是the
hours，引导词在定语从句中作状语，因此要用when来引导此定语从句。有时命题者会在先行词与引导词之间加入附加成分，影响考生正常的解题思路，需特别注意。
Unit 6 能力训练
1. 单句改错
1.It’s time for us to clean the desks. But we can’t find any
clothes.
简析：把clothes改为cloths。cloth作不可数名词时，是“布匹”的意思，它作可数名词时表示有特殊用途的布，其复数形式为cloths,而clothes是“衣服”的意思，不符合本句意思，故改为cloths表示“擦桌布”。
2.He prefer swimming to play football in summer.
简析：将play改为playing。prefer A to B 等于like A better than
B，即喜欢A胜过喜欢B，prefer+名词/动名词+to+名词/动名词，to 为介词，故不能接动词原形。
3.The girl students in our school are not allowed wearing high-heel
shoes.
简析：把wearing改为to wear。allow可接带不定式的复合结构，“allow sb.to do
sth.”表示“允许某人做某事”，其被动式应为“sb.be allowed to do
sth.”。另外，allow可跟动名词作宾语，构成allow doing sth.表示“允许做某事”，此结构不可用于表达该句意义。
4.My house is quite close from the station.
简析：把from改为to。表示“接近于……”，应该是“be close to”，而不用“be close from”。
5.I apologize you that I had been so rude to you.
简析：此句应为I apologize(to you) for being so rude to you.
表示“为某事向某人道歉”用apologize to sb.for sth./doing sth.,不能用that引导从句。
2. 高考真题
1.(上海，42)-You’ve given us a wonderful Chinese dinner, Mrs.Wang.
-___________.
A. Oh,I’m afraid I didn’t cook very well B. I’m glad you enjoyed it
C. Come again when you are free D. It’s not necessary for you to say
so
简析：选B。此题要注意两种文化背景的不同而带来的行为习惯的差异。
2. (2000上海)-I don’t have any change with me. Will you pay the fare
for me?
-___________.
A. That’s fine B. Nothing serious C. Never mind D. No problem
简析：选D。D是回答别人的请求的用语，相当于“没问题”。
3. (NMET 2000春)It was an exciting moment for these football fans
this year,___________for the first time in years their team won the
World Cup.
A. that B. while C. when D. which
简析：选C。此处是非限制性定语从句，排除while(不引导定语从句)和that(不引导非限制性定语从句)。关系词在从句中作时间状语，要用关系副词when，而不用关系代词which。
4. (NMET 2000)Dorothy was always speaking highly of her role in the
play, _____,of course, made the others unhappy.
A. who B. which C. this D. what
简析：选B。“of course”是插入语，略去不管则可看出，此处是个非限制性定语从句，需添一个关系词，排除this
和what。又因先行词是事情“always speaking highly of her role in the
play”,因此用which,而不用who。
5. (NMET 2001春)John said he’d been working in the office for an
hour,___________was true.
A. he B. this C. which D. who
简析：选C。此处是非限制性定语从句，需用关系代词，排除A. he和B. this。先行词不是“人”(不是说“约翰是真的”)，排除C.
who。先行词是事物(是说“he’d been working in the office for an
hour”是真实情况)，关系代词用which。
6. (NMET 2001春)-Why haven’t you bought any butter?
-I___________to but I forgot about it.
A. liked B. wished C. meant D. expected
简析：选C。“mean to (buy some
butter)”表示“本意是(要买些黄油)”，用了过去式表示“原打算”，此处将不定式省略，只留了不定式符号“to”。“like to
do sth. ”是“喜欢干某事”；“wish to do sth. ”是“希望做某事”；“expect to do sth.
”是“预计干某事”都与上下文题义不合。
Unit 7 cultural relics
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
Where there is a river, there is a city. 有河流的地方就有城市。
=there is a city at the place where there is a rive.
Where 在这里引导的是地点状语从句，相当于介词in/at/to+ the place +where
从句（定语从句），意思是“在……地方”。例如：
Crops grow well where there is a plenty of sunshine. 阳光充足的地方庄稼就长得好。
Where there is oppression ,there is fighting. 哪里有压迫，哪里就有反抗。
Where there is a sound, there must be sound waves. 有声音的地方，一定有声波。
Where there is smoke, there is fire. 有烟的地方就有火。
Where bees are, there is honey. 有蜜蜂的地方就有蜂蜜。
Where there is a will, there is a way. 有志者事竟成。
2. under prep. being in a state of (sth.) 在（某事物）的状况中
under control under study under repair
under examination under construction under discussion
引申：repair用作复数形式，意思是“修理工作，修理工程”。（The shop is closed during the
repairs．商店内部整修，暂停营业。）
3. give in 屈服，投降, 提交，呈交 give up 放弃
He has given in to my view. 他已经屈服于我的观点了。
Give in your examination papers when you have finished. 答完卷子后就交卷吧。
You shouldn’t give up hope. 你不该放弃希望。
He gave up his position as a manager. 他放弃了经理的职位。
I give up. Tell me the answer. 我放弃，告诉我答案。
有关give一词还有如下短语：
give away 赠送，颁发，泄露 give back 归还，同return
give off 发出（烟、光、热等） give out 筋疲力尽；耗尽，分发，散发；
4. seem后接形容词，名词，不定式，分词或介词短语等作表语
He seems quite pleased with your work.
He seemed to have a high opinion of you.
He seems a foolish boy.
It seems raining.
Everybody seems in high spirits.
注意：（1）seem后接to be 时，注意to be 的省略。
e.g. Tom came to see you this morning. He seemed (to be ) tired.
Yesterday I met a man who seemed to be the boss.(此时的to be
不能省略。因为名词前没有修饰语)
（2）seem 的否定形式。有两种：
e.g. She doesn’t seem to be at home. She seems not to be at home.
(3) There be 句型中
There seems (to be) something wrong with your computer.
(4) It seems 后接that 或as if从句，引导词that 或as if有时可省。
e.g. It seems (as if) there will be an election soon.
It seems to me that he is right.
(5) seem like = look like 看起来好象
They seemed like many little flags.
(6) seem to be doing sth.好像在做某事
They seem to be working in the field.他们好像在地里干活。
(7)seem to have done/been…好像已经……
e.g. The girl seems to have learnt about that sad
news.那女孩似乎已经知道那使人悲伤的消息。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
5. in ruins 成为废墟，严重受损
An earthquake left the whole town in ruins.那次地震过后，全城到处是残垣断壁。
His career is/lies in ruins. 他已前途尽毁。
ruin 用作动词，意思是“毁坏，使毁灭”，常用作及物动词。
The earthquake in 1976 ruined the whole city of
Tangshan．一九七六年地震毁坏了整个唐山。
(2)用作不可数名词，意思是“毁灭，崩溃”。
e．g．The accident brought him to ruin all his life. 这个事故毁灭了他一生。
(3)用作复数形式，意思是“废墟，遗迹”。
The visitors were struck by the ruins of Rome．参观者被古罗马的遗迹迷住了。
6. bring．．．back to life“使……恢复生机”。
The trees and flowers bring the city back to life．树木和鲜花使这座城市恢复了生机。
bring back 意思是“带回来、拿回来、使恢复；使回忆起”，通常用作及物动词。
Remember to bring back the book next time．记住下次把书带回来。
This medicine can bring him back to health. 这药能让他恢复健康。
引申：bring 其他搭配
Bring down 打垮，击败，使降低 bring in 挣，引进， bring on 使发展，导致（常指坏事），促使提高，促使生长
bring out 使显出，阐明，生产，出版 bring up 抚养，养育（be brought up to do We were
brought up to respect authority. ）
7．include
(1) include 作及物动词，意思为“包含，包括”
That book includes 3 color pages.
(2) including 作介词，后接名词、代词做宾语。
There were six people in the room, including 3 children.
(3) included 过去分词充当的形容词，前面加名词和代词。
e.g. Ten of us went swimming this afternoon, our teacher included.
Six people, ______ three women, died in the battle.
Six people, three women ______, died in the battle.
The plan _______ most of your suggestions.
8. Strong，proud and united，the people of St Petersburg are the
modern heroes of Russia．
强壮、自豪而团结的圣彼得堡人民是俄国现代英雄。句中 strong，proud and
united是形容词，在句中作状语，表示伴随情况。
在英语中，形容词或形容词短语，在句中可用作状语。可以放在句末，也可放在句首。
Full of anger again，Crusoe returned
home． 克鲁索又满心怒气地回家了。(伴随状语)Thirsty and eager to get a rest，he went
into the tea-house and sat down at a little table by the
window． 由于有些口渴，又想休息一下，他就走进茶馆，在靠窗子的一张小桌旁坐下。(原因状语)
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
9. represent 代表 representative 可数名词，意思为“代表”
represent sth. 代表 represent sth. (to sb.) 向……说明，阐述，表达
represent oneself as / to be自称是，声言
He represents himself as an expert in English. 他自称是英语专家。
He represented China in the conference． 他代表中国参加这个会议。
The dove represents peace． 鸽子象征和平。
The picture represents the battle of Waterloo．这幅画描绘的是滑铁卢战役。
10. Portrait 肖像，画像，通常用作可数名词。
This is a portrait of me． 这是我的肖像。
辨析：portrait，picture，painting，drawing
①portrait“肖像”，“画像”，尤其指面部的相片，也可指生动的人物描写或刻画。
②picture 指广义的“图画，照片”。
③painting 指着色的“画”。
④drawing 指“钢笔或铅笔线条画，素描”。
10. hope 意思是“希望”，后面不能直接跟名词作宾语，但可跟 for+名词，表示可实现的“希望”，后面也可跟 that
引导的从句。
e．g．I hope for success． 我希望成功。
I hope that you will be better soon． 我希望你能很快好起来。
11. Breath 用作名词，意思是“呼吸，气息”。
He ran upstairs out of breath． 他上气不接下气跑上楼来了。
When he saw the 1ion，he held his breath. 当他看到狮子时，他不出声。
(2)由 breath 构成的常见短语。
catch one's breath 屏息，喘息 hold one's breath 不出声，屏息 short of
breath 呼吸短促 lose one's breath 喘不过气来 out of breath 上气不接下气
12. It is said that…. Sb./ sth. is said to be /do
“据说……听说……”， it 为形式主语，代替后面的that 从句和不定式短语。
e.g. It is said that the strange old man is a great artist.
= The strange old man is said to be a great artist.
13. build, set up, found 和put up
(1)build “建造，建立，建设”其后可接具体的或抽象的名词。
e.g. They wanted to build a state of their own.
(2)set up “开办，建立”常和表示组织、机构、团体等意义的名词连用，这时和build的
用法基本相同。但build更注重打基础，set up 表示用基金创立。set up a school/ government
(3) found“兴建，建立，创办”后面可接城市、国家、党派等。还可表示捐资兴办学校/政府。 e.g. found a new
school
(4) put up着重指建造或搭建起一个具体的物体. e.g. put up a building
14.space表示“太空、空间”，多用作不可数名词
in space 在太空，在空间（不要带任何冠词） outer space 外层空间
There are millions of stars in space moving continuously.
太空中有数以百万计的星星在不停的运动。
He was staring into space.他极目远眺。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
15. 能力训练
(一)单句改错
1.Wang Hong is impossible to attend the meeting.
简析：本句应改为It is impossible for Wang Hong to attend the
meeting。因为impossible不能修饰人，也不用它来作某人的表语，它只能用来修饰物。
2.I won’t come without inviting to the meeting.
简析：本句应改为I won’t come without being invited to the
meeting.“invite”为及物动词，有“invite sb. to +n.”与“invite sb. to do
sth.”。此处的“invite”的逻辑宾语是句子的主语“I”，因此，此处的“without”之后该用“being invited to do”。
3.He seemed that he had seen the film several times.
简析：本句应改为It seemed that he had seen the film several
times.“seem”表示“似乎”“好像”时，常见句型有：
(1)It seems/seemed that…
(2)Sb. seems/seemed (to be)+adj./n.
(3)Sb. seems/seemed to do sth.
(4)It seems/seemed as if…
4.Almost all the buildings were in ruin.
简析：本句中的“ruin”应改为“ruins”。因为“(be) in ruins”为一固定短语，意为“成为废墟”。
5.It was foolish for him to waste his money on such a computer.
简析：应把for改为of。因为这里是“对人的评价”，而不是“对事的评价”。“对人的评价”应用句型“It is+adj.+of sb.
to do sth.”“对事的评价”则是“It is+adj.+for sb. to do sth.”详解见知识归纳1。
6.Having got a driving license,he tried to drive on real road.
简析：“tried to drive”应改为“tired driving”。因为“try doing
sth.”意为“尝试做某事”，而“try to do sth.”则是“尽力去做某事”。
二。 高考真题
1.(上海高考)The ___________ boy was last seen ___________ near the
East Lake.
A. missing; playing B. missing; play C. missed; played D. missed; to
play
简析：选A。该题译为“那个丢失的小男孩最后一次被看见时正在东湖边玩耍。”“missing”表示“丢失的”，see sb .do
sth.表示“看见某人做了某事”，see sb. doing
sth.表示“看见某人正在做某事”。据题意，只能选A。选项B、C、D动词形式均不对。
2.(NMET 1999)You should make it a rule to leave things ___________
you can find them again.
A. when B. where C. then D. there
简析：选B。本题考查副词when和where的使用，也涉及表示时间的then和表示地点的there。题干中to leave
things和find them
again是关键提示。由此可确定需选用与地点有关的副词；又从句子结构判断，后面分句应为地点状语从句，修饰动词leave，因而选择B项。
3.(20春季高考)All the preparations for the task ___________,and we’re
ready to start.
A. completed B. complete C. had been completed D. have been
completed
简析：选D。此处谓语动词应选被动式，表示“准备工作被完成”，排除A和B。又因下文用现在时“are
ready”，上文也应着眼在现在，用现在完成时，表示过去动作“完成了准备工作”对现在的影响是“现在已准备出发”。故选D项。
4.(2000年春季高考)These wild flowers are so special I would do
___________ I can to save them.
A. whatever B. that C. which D. whichever
简析：选A。全句意为“这些野花如此奇特，我要尽我所能来挽救它们。”宾语从句“whatever I can
(do)”中的do被省略了，而whatever作这个do的宾语。不选B。因为that引导宾语从句时本身不作成分。而C、D两项不合题意。句尾不定式“to
save them”作目的状语。故选A。
5.(NMET 2000)-What about having a drink?
-___________.
A. Good idea B. Help yourself C. Go ahead, please D. Me, too
简析：选A。这是考查交际用语。“喝一杯怎么样？”A项是“好主意”表示赞同。B项“你自己动手(夹菜)吃吧。”是请他人用餐。C项“请继续吧。”是允许他人行事。D项是“我也要一杯吧。”表示自己也如此。故选A项。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
Unit 8 sports
1. stand for 代表
e.g. (1) P.O. stands for Post Office. 字母P.O.代表Post Office.
(2) P.R.C. stands for the People’s Republic of China.
P.R.C.三个字母是中华人民共和国的缩写。
引申： Stand 站立，使直立（如stand the ladder against the wall）位于,矗立（An old oak
tree once stood here.）；（用于否定，疑问句）忍受，经受 (I can’t stand his brother.
我受不了他的兄弟。) I can’t stand people interrupting all the
time.我无法忍受老有人打岔）
Stand by 袖手旁观，待命， stand out 出色，杰出，显眼，突出
Four points stand out as being more important than the rest .
有四点比其余更重要。
She is the sort of person who stands out in a crowd. 她是那种在人群中很显眼的人。
2. would rather 宁愿
宁愿做某事 would rather do sth. prefer to do sth.
宁愿不做某事 would rather not do sth. prefer not to do sth.
宁愿做某事而不愿做（另外）某事
would rather do sth. than do sth. prefer doing sth. to doing
sth.
3. every four years每四年
every 与数词或other，few等连用，表示时间或空间的间隔，其几个主要结构如下：
（1）every+基数词+复数名词
Take the medicine every six hours. 每隔6小时吃一次药。
（2）every+序数词+单数名词
He comes to see his uncle every third week. 他每三个星期来看望他叔叔一次。
（3）every +other+单数名词，“每隔一……”
Write on every other line.请隔行写。
（4）every +few+复数名词，“每隔几……”
Trees should be planted every few metres.
树应间隔几米种一棵。
4. compete v.竞争，比得上；比赛
compete in(a game，a match)参加compete with/against sb.和某人竞争compete
for(a prize，a medal，the first place)角逐
词形变化：competition n.竞争；比赛，竞赛
competitor n.竞争者，竞争对手
5. .in modern times
time作“时代”解时，常用复数形式（times)。
in ancient times在古代 in modern times在现代
e.g. (1) Times have changed，and we shouldn’t fall behind them.
时代变了，我们不应落后于时代。
(2) She didn’t understand the spirit of the times. 她不理解那个时代的精神。
time作“时代”时，也可用单数形式。
in Shakespeare’s time(在莎士比亚时代)
6. rank vt, vi 1）分类；分等级 2）整齐排列
This town ranks high among beauty spots. 这城市在风景区中享有盛名。
cups ranked neatly on the shelf 杯子整齐地排列在架子上
n 1）等级 the rank of general 将军衔2）社会地位 3）列；排；行列
people of all ranks 各阶层人民
a taxi rank 一列出租车
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
7. 词语辨析
(一)game, match, contest, competition
(1)game“游戏，比赛，运动”，可指户内、户外、脑力、体力均可，指球赛时多用于美国英语。棋类、桥牌等比赛中多用game。复数可指运动会。
e. g. Let’s play a game of chess. 咱们来下盘棋吧！
Football is a game that does not interest me. 足球是我不感兴趣的一种运动。
Olympic Games/Asian Games奥运会/亚运会
(2)match“比赛、竞赛”，指球赛多用于英国英语。
它一般指预先安排好的正式比赛，摔跤、拳击等比赛中多用match。
e. g. They won the match. 他们赢得了比赛。
They played a football match against another school.
他们与另一所学校进行了一场足球赛。
(3)contest表示各种智力和知识“竞赛”，在这方面可与competition互换。
e. g. Mary won the speech contest. 玛丽在演讲赛中获胜。
She took the second place in the beauty contest. 她在选美赛中得了第二名。
(4)competition指通过个人的体力、智力、技能等竞赛而获取名次的各种比赛，也可指体力，也可指其他技能方面的。
e. g. They were in competition with each other for the prize.
他们为了得奖互相竞赛。
(二)sports, game, exercise
这三个名词都有“运动”的意思，但其含义及用法有所区别。
(1)sport指各种运动或户外消遣。如：篮球、足球、田径赛、游泳、打猎、爬山、赛车等。是各种竞赛或娱乐的总称。指娱乐性或锻炼性的体育活动时，一般作不可数名词，指竞赛性的体育活动或特指某种运动项目时是可数名词。复数时，指运动会或泛指体育运动。
e. g. He was fond of all kinds of sports, especially badminton.
他喜欢各种运动，特别是羽毛球。
Hockey, volleyball, football and tennis are all sports.
曲棍球、排球、足球和网球都是体育项目。
The school sports were put off. 学校运动会延期了。
(1)game“运动、游戏、比赛”，其含义及用法参看1中的有关game讲解。再如：
Children play games-tag, marbles, hide-and-seek and many others.
孩子们玩捉人、弹球、捉迷藏和许多其他的游戏。
We watched the football match/game on TV. 我们在电视上看了足球比赛。
How won the first two games but lost the third.
他胜了前两局，但第三局输了。(指比赛的局时，不能用match)
(3)exercise表示“运动、锻炼”，特别指保持健康的运动。用于指体育运动时是不可数名词，指某种活动锻炼，体操时是可数名词(常用复数)。
e. g. Walking, running, rowing and horse riding are all healthy
forms of exercise. 散步、跑步、划船和赛马都是有益健康的运动。
Every morning, we see many old people doing morning exercises.
每天早上我们看见许多老人在做早操。
(三)beat, defeat, win, earn
1)beat, defeat都表示在战斗中或竞赛中“战胜、打败(对手)”，后接竞争对手，可以互换。
e. g. beat the competitor/the country/the team…打败对手/国家/那个队……
I can beat/defeat you at swimming. 我游泳比得过你。
He was defeated/beaten at chess. 他棋下输了。
2)win“战胜、赢得”，其宾语通常是比赛、战争、奖品或表尊重、崇拜之类意义的词。竞争对手不能作其宾语。
By her hard work, she won herself a place on the school team.
在刻苦训练下，她在校队里赢得了地位。
Our team won the game. 我们队获胜了。
His poem won the first prize of ten dollars. 他的诗获得了10美元的一等奖。
(3)earn“赢得，挣得”，表示通过工作等获得钱财和利益或经过努力获得地位和荣誉等。
He earned 100 dollars a day. 他一天挣100美元。
He earned the admiration of the world by his working hard for the
world peace. 他为世界和平努力工作，博得了全世界的赞誉。
(四)gold, golden
(1)gold作名词“黄金”，形容词“金质的，黄金的”。
e. g. All that glitters is not gold. 发光的未必都是金子。
In Barcelona the Chinese team got 16 gold medals. 在巴塞罗那，中国队获得了16块金牌。
(2)golden是形容词“金黄色的，黄金般的”。
e. g. The child has blue eyes and golden hair. 那孩子长着碧眼金发。
Good health can make old age the golden years of your life.
健康能使老年成为你生命中的黄金年华。
(五)join, take part in, attend, join in, join sb. in sth.
(1)join“参加”指加入党派、社会、团体等并成为其中一员。
e. g. He joined the Party in 1980. 他是1980年入党的。
Many of them have joined the army. 他们很多人都参军了。
(2)join in表示“参加某种活动”，in可为介词，可为副词。作介词时，此短语可用join代替。
Eight million people joined in the battle against drought.
800万人参加了抗旱斗争。
They danced and danced until a lot of us joined in.
他们不停地跳着舞，直到我们中间有许多人都参加了进去。
(3)join sb. in sth. /doing sth. 表示“参加某人所从事的活动”。
Come and join us in the game. 来和我们一起做游戏吧。
All the family join me in wishing you a happy future. 全家人和我一道祝你将来幸福。
(4)take part in指“参加群众性活动、会议”等多用于正式场合，比join郑重。
We all take an active part in extracurricular activities.
我们都积极参加课外活动。
I took part in the game. 我们参加了比赛。
(5)attend “参加”着重指“到场，出席(会议、典礼、仪式等)”。
She is sure to attend the wedding. 她一定会去参加婚礼。
He decided to attend the meeting himself. 他决定亲自赴会。
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
四、能力训练
(一)单句改错
1. I prefer doing to talk.
简析：talk改为talking。因“prefer+n. /doing to+n. /doing”为固定用法。
2. We often write an English competition every the other week.
简析：去掉the。因every other day(week, month, year…)中，other前不能带the，习惯表达。
3. Sport can keep us healthy.
简析：Sport改为Sports。因表示“娱乐、消遣”时，sport为不可数名词，指“运动项目、运动会，泛指体育运动”时，为可数名词，常用其复数形式。
4. This is the book in which I spent 25 yuan.
简析：in改为on。因spend…on sth. , spend…(in) doing为习惯搭配。
5. Would you like to join us for the game.
简析：for改为in，因join sb. in sth. 为固定搭配。
6. He has won a medal to his great success.
简析：to改为for，因表示“因……而获奖牌”，常用“win a medal for sth. 或receive a medal for
sth. ”。
7. The five rings linked together also mean friendship or peace all
over the world.
简析：or改为and。从意义上讲，friendship与peace为并列的递进关系，而不是选择关系。
8. The Olympic Games is held every four years.
简析：is改为are。因the Olympic Games作主语，谓语动词应用复数。
9. That was a very excited match.
简析：excited改为exciting。因-ed分词形容词表示内在的、自身的，-ing分词形容词表示外在的，令人/使人怎么样的。比赛应为“令人感到激动”。
五、高考真题
1. (NMET 1998)They ___________ the train until it disappeared in the
distance.
A. saw B. watched C. noticed D. observed
简析：本题考查动词辨义，四个词均有“看”的意思，只有watch表示“集中注意力看”，题意为“他们看着火车，一直看到它消失在远处”。故应选B。
2. (上海2000)They’re not very good, but we like ___________.
A. anyway to play basketball with them B. to play basketball with
them anyway
C. to play with them basketball anyway D. with them to play
basketball anyway
简析：本题考查英语句子语序，to play basketball with
them是不定式短语，作宾语，放在like之后，anyway作状语，放在宾语后，故应选B。
3. (上海)An accident happened at ___________ crossroads a few
metres away from ___________ bank.
A. a; a B. /; a C. /; the D. the; /
简析：本题考查冠词用法，两空处均泛指，即“离一家银行几米远的一个十字路口”。故应选A。
4. (上海2000)The gentleman ___________ you told me yesterday proved to
be a thief.
A. who B. about whom C. whom D. with whom
简析：tell sb. of/about sth. “向某人讲述某事”。本题考查“介词+关系代词”引导定语从句。故选B。
Unit 9 Technology
1. turn …inside out:里面翻到外面。彻底地。一般用作状语
He often wears his sweater inside out 他经常翻穿球衫
The new manager turned the old systems inside out. 经理对旧体制进行了彻底的改革。
2. I should be home in about ten minutes.
should 在本句中用来表示一种可能性，相当于 will probably 一般用于对事实的一种比较有把握的判断（多用在将来时）。
例如： - When will I take my photos? 我什么时候取照片？
- It should be ready at 12 o'clock. 应该 12 点钟会好的。
The plane should be late for at least half an hour in such bad
weather. 在这样糟的天气里，飞机应该可能会迟到至少半个小时。
He has worked on the book for seven days, he should have finished
it now. 他弄这本书已有 7 天了，到现在为止应该已经完成了。
She should be here any minute. 她该马上就到。
Dinner should be ready by now. 此刻晚饭应该做好了。
in about ten minutes [用法]大约十分钟以后,主要用于将来时间
1. throughout，all over，all through 三者都有“遍及，贯穿”之意，但在用法上有所不同。
(1)throughout作介词，接表示时间或地点的名词，意思是“在整个期间”“从一端至另一端”即“在整个地区”。
The news spread throughout the country. 这个消息传遍了全国。
It rained throughout the night. 雨下了整整一夜。
throughout作副词，意思为“到处、全部、处处、始终、彻头彻尾”。
The room is painted throughout. 这屋子全部油漆一新。
The boy remained silent throughout. 那男孩始终保持沉默。
(2)all over意为“在(遍及)……的各部分”，只接表示地点的名词。
Computers will be used more and more in the future all over the
world. 将来全世界要越来越多的使用电脑。
The disease spread all over the country. 疾病在全国蔓延开了。
all over作副词，意思为“到处都是、全部结束”。
He is wet all over. 他浑身湿透了。
The war was all over. 战争彻底结束了。
(3)all through意思为“在整个……期间”，后面接表示时间的名词。
e.g. Some cold-blooded animals hibernate all through the winter.
一些冷血动物整个冬天都冬眠。
2. add v.加；增加；加起来；又说，补充
If the tea is too strong，add some more hot water. 如果茶太浓，再加点开水。
May I add a point? 我可以补充一点意见吗？
add to 增加add…to…加，往……添加……
His illness added to the family’s trouble. 他的病给家里增加了负担。
Will you add more sugar to your coffee? 你的咖啡要多加些糖吗？
Three added to four is seven. 3加4等于7。
add up合计，加起来
These figures don’t add up right. 这些数字加起来不对。
add up to总共有，总计达
His whole school education added up to no more than one year.
他所受的全部学校教育加起来不过一年。
3. remind v.使（人）想起，使记起，提醒
remind sb.of/ about…使(人）想起……
He reminds me of his father. 看到他使我想起他的父亲。
remind sb.to do…使人想做……，提醒某人做……
I reminded him to work hard.我提醒他要用功。
Remind sb.that…使人想起，提醒，警告
She reminded me that I hadn’t watered the flowers. 她提醒我还没有浇花。
4. in case of…在……情形时，万一……；如果
e.g. (1) In case of fire，call 119. 倘若有火灾，就打119电话。
in case在……的情况下，万一……的话；以防，免得；
in case后接从句时，从句中的谓语动词常用一般现在时态，偶尔也要should+v.
In case anything important happens，please call me up.
万一发生什么重要的事情，请打电话给我。
Take your umbrella，in case it should rain. 带伞去吧，以防下雨。
in case还可作副词用，意为“以防万一，免得”。
You’d better carry some money in case. 你最好带些钱，以防万一。
in any case无论如何，反正，不管怎样
In any case，do your best. 无论如何，要尽力而为。
in no case绝不，在任何情形下都不
In no case should you give up. 你绝不应该放弃。（放在句首时倒装）
in the case of介词短语，意为“就……来说”“至于……”。
In the case of the forest program, we leave it for further
discussion.
in all/most/particular cases 在任何/大多数/特殊情况下
in the present/the worst/this/that/possible case
在目前/最坏的/这种/那种/可能的情况下
In the present case, what we should do is just waiting.
5. wh-ever的用法归纳
whatever, whichever, whoever,
whomever可以引导名词性从句，也可以引导让步状语从句，引导让步状语从句时，可以换成no matter
what/which/who/whom，位置可在主句前，也可在主句后。
Take whatever you want.(宾语从句) 你可以拿你想要的任何东西。
Whoever breaks the law should be punished.(主语从句) 不管谁违反了法律都应受到惩罚。
We will complete the work on time, no matter what happens.(状语从句)
=Whatever happens, we will complete the work on time.
不管发生什么事，我们都将按时完成工作。
Whenever he goes abroad, he will buy presents for his sister. =No
matter when he goes abroad,… 不论何时出国，他都为她的妹妹买些礼物。
注意：however还有“无论多么”的意思。如：
However cold it was, he wanted to go swimming. 不管天气多么冷，他都想去游泳。
6. take over 接管;接受
When he retired, his eldest son took over the farm. 他退休后,他的长子接管了农场.
Take 其他搭配：
took an interest； take action to do, take time, take your time,
take apart 拆开；take down 拆掉，拆除，写下；
take in 收留， 欺骗，蒙骗， （take sth in）吸收，改小，Take out 带某人出去，切除（身体一部分）；
He was homeless, so we took him in. 他无家可归，所以我们收留了他。
Don’t be taken in by his charm-he’s ruthless. 别被他迷人的风度骗了，其实他冷酷无情。
Fish take in oxygen through their gills. 鱼用鳃吸入氧气。
Take off 起飞，迅速流行，取消，脱掉
Take on 呈现，承担，接纳（乘客）
The chameleon can take on the colors of its background.
变色龙可以变成周围环境的颜色。
We’re not taking on any new clients at present. 我们目前不接受新客户。
Take up 占用时间，地方等；开始从事，继续（他人未完成的事）
The table takes up too much room. 桌子占太多地方。
I won’t take up any more of your time. 我不想再占用你们的时间了。
They’ve taken up golf.他们学起打高尔夫球来了。
He takes up his duties next week. 他下周就要履行职责。
She took up the story where Tim had left off. 她接着讲Tim 未讲完的故事。
7. They have to repair machines when they break down.
. break down 1) 破坏；拆散 2) 失败；破裂 3) 精神崩溃；失去控制 4)（机器）损坏 5) 起化学变化
Chemicals in the body break our food down into useful substances.
人体中的化学元素把食物分解成有用的物质。
The peace talks are said to have broken down. (喻)据说和谈破裂了。
Our truck broke down outside town. 我们的卡车在城外抛锚了。
The car broke down halfway to the destination.汽车在到达目的地的中途抛锚了。
He broke down and wept. 他不禁失声痛哭。
Food is broken down by chemicals. 化学物质引起食物转化
Break 其他搭配：break in 破门而入， 插话， break into 破门而入；break away from 脱离
break off 断开，折断； 中断，停顿；
The back section of the plane had broken off.飞机尾部脱落了。
He broke off in the middle of the sentence. 他一句话说了一半就不说了。
break out 爆发
break through 突破，冲破，战胜
Scientists think they are beginning to break through in the fight
against cancer.
Demonstrators broke through the police cordon.示威群众冲破了警方的警戒线。
He had finally managed to break through her reserve.他终于设法消除了她的拘谨。
break up 粉碎，破碎，拆开，打散
The ship broke up on the rocks. 船触礁撞碎了。
Sentences can be broken up into clauses. 句子可以分成从句。
break up (with sb)绝交: She’s just broken up with her boyfriend.
7. come up with 提出;提供;想出;赶上
Scientists will have to come up with new methods of increasing the
world s food supply.
科学家们必须为增加世界粮食供应提供新方法.
He walked so fast that I couldn’ t come up with him.
8. succeedvi. 成功 vt.接续;继承
He succeeded in getting the job. 他谋得了那份工作。
The millionaire s eldest son will succeed to his
estate.这百万富翁的长子将继承他的产业。
The storm was succeeded by calm. 暴风雨后一片宁静。
9. in the future将来：未来 in future以后；今后＝for the future
Who knows what will happen in the future？谁知道将来会发生什么？
I will study hard in future．我今后要努力学习
6. (一)单句改错
1.Why not to come to our home for the party?
简析：去掉come前的to。Why not do sth.?是表示建议的常用句型，not后跟动词原形，也可用Why don’t you
do sth.?
2.Swimming is a great fun.
简析：去掉a。fun是不可数名词，通常不与冠词a或the连用。
3.Computers can be used to doing a lot of things.
简析：将doing改为do。be used
to表示被用来做某事，to是不定式符号，其后接动词原形。如果它表示“习惯于做某事”时，to则是介词，后接名词、代词、动名词。
4.She gave me a lot of valuable advices.
简析：advices改为advice。advice当建议、忠告讲时，是不可数名词。
5.The title boy didn’t dare crossing the street by himself.
简析：将crossing改为to cross。dare作行为动词，后接不定式作宾语。
6.Mr Green’s family are going to London on the holiday.
简析：on改为for。因“go to somewhere for the (one’s )
holiday”，表示“去某地度假”，固定搭配。
(二)易错题
1.The motorbike is so nice.I think it costs ___________ ten thousand
yuan.
A. in the least B. at most C. no more than D. at least
简析：答案选D。根据题意，应用at least表示“至少值一万元”。
2.___________ we do must be in the interests of the people.
A. However B. No matter how C. Whatever D. No matter what
简析：选C。“No matter…”只能引导让步状语从句而whatever引导名词性从句也可引导让步状语从句。
3.His words remind me ___________ we did during the summer vacation?
A. that B. of that C. of what D. what
简析：选C。remind sb. of
sth.意思为“使某人想起某事”。题中缺of的宾语，由what引导的宾语从句作of的宾语。并且what既作宾语从句的引导词，又作动词did的宾语。
4.He practised speaking English with the teacher and his classmates
___________ possible.
A. where B. whatever C. whenever D. whichever
简析：选C。本题意思是“每当可能的时候，他总会与老师及同学们一起练习讲英语”。whenever“无论何时”=no matter
when，引导让步状语从句。本句中的“whenever possible”是whenever it is possible的省略形式。
5.Sometimes grass ___________ paper.
A. is used to making B. used to make C. is used to make D. used for
making
简析：选C。因be used to do sth. 意为“被用于做某事”，本句还可写为：Sometimes grass is used
for making paper。
6. There are _____ five people in my family. They are my
grandparents, my parents and I.
A. as many B. more than C. not more than D. no more than
简析：选D。not more than意为“不足、少于”；not more than意为“仅仅，正好”；more
than意为“超过，不仅仅”。
五、高考真题
1.(NMET 2000,6)-What about having a drink?
-___________.
A. Good idea B. Help yourself C. Go ahead, please D. Me, too
简析：选A。对别人的提议表示赞成，为Good idea或That’s a good idea。
2.(2000春招)John may phone tonight. I don’t want to go out ___________
he phones.
A. as long as B. in order that C. in case D. so that
简析：选C。题中A为“只要”，B为“为了”，C为“以防”，D为“结果”。根据句意应选C。
3.(NMET 2000)I don’t think I’ll need any money but I’ll bring some
___________.
A. at last B. in case C. once again D. in time
简析：选B。A为“最终”，B为“万一”，C“又一次”，D为“及时”。本题意为“我认为我不会需要钱的，但我还是带些以防万一”。
4. (NMET 2001,春招)A new cinema ___________ here. They hope to finish
it next month.
A. will be built B. is built C. has been built D. is being built
简析：选D。从后面的提示看，这项工程还没有完工，故应是正在建设之中，而且是被动语态。
Unit 10 The world around us
1. cut down 砍倒，减少，降低，缩短
The little boy cut down the young tree with an axe.
The doctor told me to cut down on drinking.
Cut 其他搭配：
cut off 砍掉，切掉
引申：cut across/through 取捷径；走近路
cut back 剪枝；修剪 减少；缩小；削减
to cut back on industrial production 缩减工业生产
cut in 插嘴, 超车抢挡；（突然）插入
Don't cut in while I'm talking. 我说话时别插嘴。
to cut in on a queue 加塞儿
cut off 中断，切掉，砍掉，使与外界隔绝（be cut off from ）
cut out 剪下；删除；
to cut out smoking 戒烟
cut up 切碎 使受苦
Jean was really cut up when her husband left her. 在丈夫抛弃她之后，简痛苦极了。
2. die out 死绝；消失，消灭
That custom died out years ago. 那种风俗许多年前就消失了。
The lights died out suddenly. 灯突然熄灭了。
die of/from 因……而死
She died of cancer/old age. 她死于癌症（终享天年）。
die from overwork/a wound操劳过度（受伤）而死
die away(声音、光线、风等)渐弱，渐息
The sound of their laughter died away. 她们的笑声渐渐消失了。
Die down 逐渐变弱，逐渐平息
The flames finally died down. 火焰越来越小，最后熄灭了。
die+名（形）死于……状态
die young/happy英年早逝（含笑九泉）
be dying for（口语）渴望……，很想……
He was dying for a drink. 他很渴望喝点酒。
3. adapt v. 使……适应，使……适合adapt oneself to适应…… adapt sth. to sth.
使…….适应……. adapted adj.适合……的；改编成……的
He couldn’t adapt his way of life to the company. 他的生活方式无法适应公司（的要求）。
He is quick to adapt(himself)to new circumstances. 他很会适应新环境。
The play is adapted from a novel. 这是一部由小说改编成的戏剧。
4. the other day，some day，one day，another day
(1)the other day“几天前”(a few days ago)指过去，只能用于过去时态。
The other day I met Mary in the street. 几天前，我在街上碰上玛丽了。
(2)some day“总有一天，某一天”指将来，通常只用于一般将来时或过去将来时，可与one day替换。
We are going to visit the museum some day/one day next week.
我们打算下周某一天去参观博物馆。
(3)one day“某一天，有一天”，可指过去的某一天，也可指将来的某一天(指将来的某一天可与some day互换。)
One day you will be punished. 总有一天你会受到惩罚的。
One day I saw a beggar walking along the street. 有一天我看见一个乞丐沿着大街行走。
(4)another day “改天”，指将来的一天。
I will see you again another day. 我改天会再来看你的。
5. devote vt.奉献
devote sth. / oneself to 致力于，把……奉献给
He has devoted his whole life to science.他把一生都奉献给了科学事业。
I don’t think it worthwhile to devote so much time to discussing the
matter.
我认为花这么多时间来讨论这件事不值得。
形容词devoted 意思有两种
忠实的，慈爱的，恩爱的
献身……的，专心于……的，专用于…….的，热心的
e.g. a devoted son, mother, father
The newly married couple next door to us are devoted to sports.
The magazine is devoted to science.
6.
(一)单句改错
1. At the present, we don’t have any trouble in solving the
problems.
简析：去掉第一个the, 或在present后加time。
at present是固定短语，意为“现在、目前”。也可用at the present time 来表示。
2. Too much of the deer in the country have been killed.
简析：将much改为many。too much后接的是不可数名词。too many后接可数名词。句中的deer是可数名词，其单复数同形。
3. The sun was disappeared behind the cloud.
简析：把was去掉。disappear表示“消失，失踪”，是不及物动词，不能用于被动语态。
4. Some day, I saw some foreign visitors in the park.
简析：把Some改为One。some day和one
day都作“有一天”讲。但前者是指“将来有一天”，只能用于将来时态的句子中；后者既可用于“过去的某一天”，也可用于“将来的某一天”。
5. There used to have an old temple in the village.
简析：把have改为be。used to用于there be结构中，即There used to be…意为“过去有……”。
五、高考真题
1. (1999 上海)My parents always let me have my own ______ of living.
A. way B. method C. manner D. fashion
简析：答案为A。have one’s own way of doing sth. 是习惯用法，意为“有自己做某事的方法”。
2. (NMET 1998)-Can you come on Monday or Tuesday?
-I’m afraid ___________day is possible.
A. either B. neither C. some D. any
简析：答案为B。
前句提到Monday or Tuesday, 意为在两者之中选择，故可排除C、D两项。后文用I’m
afraid…来回答，显然是否定含义，故选neither，意为两天都不可能。
3. (2002 北京)All the people ___________ at the party were his
supporters.
A. present B. thankful C. interested D. important
简析：答案为A。
由句意可知是“所有出席宴会的人都是他的支持者”，故只能选present。当“出席，在场”讲时，present作定语放在所修饰词后。
4. (NMET 2000)-Is John coming by train?
-He should, but he___________ not. He likes driving his car.
A. must B. can C. need D. may
简析：答案为D。must not意为“禁止，不许”；need not意为“不必”；can表推测多用于否定、疑问句中，但can
not表“不可能”，与句意不符。只有may not表示“有可能”。
Unit 11 The Sound of The World
Teaching aims: Vocabulary revision
Grammar revision
Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process
of the integration between the teacher and the ss
Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar
2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement
Teaching materials & focuses:
1. Practice. vi/vt 实践；练习practise doing sth 练习做某事
practice n. 练习;实践 eg. Practice makes perfect.（熟能生巧）put …into
practice 付诸实践；
practical a. 实际的;实用的
practiced a. 熟练的;精通的
2. What do you have in mind？你心里在想什么？
have sth．／sb，in mind意为心中想着（某人／某事）’含 mind的短语有：chang one’s
mind“改变主意”；be in one’s mind有……的想法、想念”；have／there is sth on one’s
mind有……心事”；keep in mind记住：make up one’s mind“打定主意．read one’s
mind“看出……的心事,知道……在想什么”；。out of sight,out of mind “眼不见为净”等.
mind还可作动词，意为“当心，介意，注意，照看”等 例如：
Mind your own business少管闲事
Mind your manners．
篇7：高三复习：高二词汇7-20单元(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
Unit 7 Phrases
1.接受或容忍 live with
2.对艾滋病人的态度 attitudes towards AIDS
3.感染艾滋病毒
become infected with HIV
4.很难治愈 be difficult to cure
5.通过以下途径传播
be transmitted via the following routes
6.不让我感到孤独和悲伤
keep me from feeling sad and lonely
7.当今最严重的社会问题
the most serious problem today
8.几百万儿童 millions of children
9.破坏人体的免役系统
break down the body’s immune system
10.至于，就…来说 as in one’s case
11.照顾，照看 take care of
12.使我认识到生命的珍贵
make me realize how precious life is
13.受感染儿童的总数
the total number of infected children
14.缺乏适当的医疗保健
a lack of proper health care
15.非常昂贵 much too expensive
16.有机会做某事 have a chance to do
17.鼓励某人做某事 encourage sb to do
18.学会如何自我保护
learn how to protect oneself
19.支持某人 support sb
20.使…感到振奋 cheer them up
21.选择做个医生 choose to be a doctor
22.面对人们对于艾滋病的恐惧
deal with people’s fear of the disease
23.抓住一切机会充实生活
take every chance to live life to the fullest
24.说服某人做某事 persuade sb to do
25.给艾滋病的研究和教育投入更多资金
spend more money on AIDS research and education
26.查清实情 find out the facts
27.一位艾滋病专家 an AIDS specialist
28.与某人握手 shake hands with sb
29.钢琴赛上获奖
win a prize at a piano competition
30.拥抱某人 give an AIDS patient a hug
31.完全摆脱疾病
be completely free from diseases
32.遇到许多困难 meet many difficulties
33.继续与疾病作斗争
continue struggle with the disease
34.上班迟到 be late for work
35.网球赛中失败
be defeated in the tennis match
36.做…是没有用的
it is no use doing sth.
37.感冒的最好治疗方法
the best treatment for a cold
38.阻止某人做某事
discourage/keep/stop/prevent sb from doing
39.浪费时间玩电脑游
waste time playing computer games
40.很长时间感到恶心
feel sick for a long time
41.带我去医院做检查
take me to hospital to have me examined
42.采血样
take samples of my blood
43.目光悲伤
there was a sad look in one’s eyes
44.患了重症
suffer from a serious disease
45.不治之症 an incurable disease
46.有特殊的功能
have a special function
47.给我上了重要的人生一课
teach me an important lesson about life
48.跟许多癌症患者一样
like many people with cancer
49.从自行车上摔下来 fall off my bike
50.改变某人的生活 change one’s life
51.相反地 on the contrary
52.学会欣赏每一天的每一分钟
learn to appreciate every minute of each day
Unit 8 Phrases
1. 失火，着火 catch fire
2.颠倒 upside down
3.急救箱 a first-aid kit
4.进行急救 give first aid
5.目击事故 witness an accident
6.紧急情况下分秒必争
seconds count in an emergency
7.记住 keep in mind
8.做出决定 make better decisions
9.准备应急 prepare for an emergency
10.保持冷静 stay calm
11.以防紧急情况 in case of an emergency
12.挽救生命 save lives
13.用流水冲洗伤口
wash the wound with cold running water
14.代表 stand for
15.把你所找到的一切送到医院
send whatever you find to the hospital
16.受伤 get hurt
17.把报纸拿颠倒
hold a newspaper upside down
18.救援即将来临 help is on the way
19. 用来纪念这位伟人
in honor of this great man
20.人工呼吸 the mouth-to-mouth method
21. 等待救护车的到来
wait for the ambulance
22.把手放在人的脖子上、手腕上
put a finger on the person’s neck or wrist
23.用干净的布盖住伤口
cover the wound with a clean piece of cloth
24.按住伤口止血
press on the wound to stop the bleeding
25.叫救护车 call an ambulance
26.把人置于康复位置
put the person in the recovery position
27. 阻止事情发生
prevent bad things from happening
28.用毯子盖住某人
cover the person with a blanket
29.帮他保暖 help him stay warm
30.设法了解足够的知识用来救命
manage to know enough to save lives
31.朝我喊叫 shout at me
32.保持平静不理睬她 keep calm and ignore her
33.摸脉 take a person’s pulse
34.没有明显的反应 give no clear response
35.分四组讨论问题
discuss the questions in groups of four
36.犯错误 make many mistakes
37.某事发生在某人身上 sth happen to sb
38.迷路 lose one’s way
39.去野餐 go for a picnic
40.死于突发性心脏病
die of a sudden heart attack
41.煤气中毒 be gas-poisoned
42.太靠近湖
get too close to the lake
43. 处理常见伤
deal with common injuries
44.关掉所有的电源
turn off all power
Unit 9 Phrases
1.解决问题难者 solve the problem
2.生产能量 produce energy
3.出席会议 attend the meeting
4.地球峰会 the Earth summit
5.欢迎参加地球峰会 welcome to the earth summit
6.尽可能多地列出理由
list as many reasons as possible
7.采取行动拯救地球
take action to save the earth
8.这次峰会的主题 the main themes of the summit
9.可持续发展 sustainable development
10.关于不同题目发表演讲
speak about different topics
11.三大公害 the big three
12.做重要的讲话
make a very important speech
13.卫生状况恶劣 poor sanitation
14.学会与大自然和平共处
learn to live in harmony with nature
15.发表你的观点 give your opinion
16.喝到洁净的水
have access to clean drinking water
17.在农村地区 in rural areas
18.住院 be in hospital
19.参与我们创造新世界
take part in the new world we create
20.为你的论点辩护
defend your argument
21.对…负有责任
have a responsibility towards
22.国际间的合作
international cooperation
23.存在严重的问题
there exist serious problems
24.来得及采取措施
there is still time to take action
25.对环境不利 be bad for the environment
26.未来的关键 the key to the future
27.与大自然协调 in harmony with nature
28.在全世界传播 spread across the world
29.不要砍伐树木stop cutting down trees
30.结束死亡和痛苦
put an end to the death and suffering
31.有可能会 there is good chance that
32.消除贫困 wipe out the poverty
33.保护水资源 protect the water resources
34.与男子有同等的机会
have true equality of opportunity with men
35.准备好回答问题
be ready to answer questions
36.得出结论 draw a conclusion
37.表示愿意来帮忙
show great willingness to come and help
38.限制汽车的数量limit the number of cars
39.对于全球变暖了解不多
not know much about global warming
40.完成关于环保的报告
finish writing his report on environmental protection
Unit 10 Phrases
1.大自然对人构成危险
nature form a danger to people
2.清理的费用 costs for cleaning up
3.对…很重要 be important to
4.飓风袭击海岸 a hurricane hits the coast
5.一点也不/很，非常 not a bit/ not a little
6.被吓死 be scared to death
7.陷入惊慌 get into a total panic
8.突如其来 all of a sudden
9.它使我毛发倒竖
make my hair stand on end
10死于难忘的灾难
die in an unforgettable disaster
11.吸引我叔叔的注意力
draw my uncle’s attention
12.距离遥远 at such a distance
13.风一下子小了下去 wind fell all at once
14.风呼啸着靠近了
the roar of the winds drew near fast
15.风暴中心 the very eye of the wind
16.请求他救她 beg him to save her
17.国内外的天气
the weather at home and abroad
18.需要勇气 call for courage
19.从…逃走 flee from
20.直奔危险地带
hold his course directly into danger
21.天气状况 the weather conditions
22.停顿了一会儿 pause for moment
23.营救他的朋友 rescue his friend
24.是否 whether … or not
25.帮助别人镇静 help the other calm down
26.给大家留下印象 give everyone the impression
27.惊慌地离开 leave in a panic
28.答应援助100万英镑
promise to offer one million pounds in aid
29.热烈欢迎他的到来
be warmly welcomed on his arrival
30.你看起来不像是老师
don’t look very much like a teacher
31.立即倒地死去了 immediately fall down dead
32.与其说他看起来死了，不如说睡着了
he looked more sleep than dead
33.记忆犹新 memories are still fresh
34.择要摘取 pick out the important bits
35.活火山 the active volcano
36.被灰尘覆盖
be covered with dirt and ashes
37.复活 come to life
38坏天气就要来临 dirty weather knocking about
39.返回到故乡 return to their home village
40.催促别国来帮忙
urge other countries to help
Unit 11 phrases
1.最杰出的新突破
the most outstanding new breakthroughs
2.有共同之处 have anything in common
3.第一次载人太空飞行
the first manned space flight
4.标志…..开始 mark the start of
5.很可能 it is likely that
6.探索太空 explore space
7.破解生命之谜solve the mysteries of life
8.取得突破性进展
make many breakthroughs
9.提出计划 put forward a plan
10.充满伟大成就
be filled with great achievements
11.具有创新精神和科学技能
share the spirit of creativity and scientific skill
12.发展经济实力 increase economic power
13.抓住机会到国内来实现他们的理想grasp the opportunity to develop their ideas at home
14.实现梦想 follow one’s dream
15.得满分 get full marks
16.世界一流be among the world’s best
17.用强有力的论点为之辩护
support it with strong arguments
18.踏进 set foot in / on
19.对…有积极的影响
have a positive effect on
20.依靠科学技术和知识
rely on science technology and knowledge
21.目的在发展农业
aim at improving agriculture
22.弄清楚 make it clear
23.对人类是一个很大的威胁
a big threat to mankind
24.应对失败并从中吸取教训
deal with and learn from failure
25.对……感到兴奋 be excited about
26.活跃起来 come to life
27.同时为祖国做出贡献
contribute to his country at the same time
28.硕士学位 a master’s degree
30.达到……目标 achieve / reach its goal
31.导致了科学技术的几项突破
lead to several breakthroughs in science and technology
Unit 12 phrases
1.大洋中最深的地方
the deepest point in the ocean
2.航天飞机 a space shuttle
3.写出概况 make a sketch of
4.我们能战胜所有疾病的时候
a time when we can beat all diseases
5.找到使我们永远年轻的方法
find a way to keep us young forever
6. 切碎 cut up
7.不知道 have no idea
8.多种情况下 in many cases
9.谋生 make a living
10.提醒某人某事 remind sb of sth
11.把…向前推进一步take…one step further
12.奠定了现代科幻小说的基础
lay the foundation of modern science fiction
13.很久之后才…… long before
14.着手做 set out to do
15.开辟一条新路 pioneer a new way
16.吸引我的注意力 attract my attention
17.结果是潜艇 turn out to be a submarine
18.越洋航行on a voyage across the oceans
19.身高八尺 about eight feet in height
20.穿着潜水服dressed in diving suits
21.发现自己被包围
find themselves surrounded by
22.整周超时工作 work overtime all week
23.从……开始 begin with
24.进行冒险 go on this adventure
25.使人了解 throw light upon
26.穿过森林 go through forests
27.许多卓越科学家的著作
the works of many brilliant scientists
28.最后,终于 in the end
29.被火车运送到目的地
be transported to the destination by train
30.水下旅行 underwater travel
31.沸腾的河 a boiling river
32.乘坐地铁 take the subway
33.开始了第一次航行 set out on its first voyage
34.沉入海底 sink to the bottom of the sea
35.成为……一例 become an example of
36.成为人们心中永久的痛
become a permanent pain in people’s hearts
37.过度工作 work too much
38.前总统 former president
39.梦想 dream of
40.在十一月的一个夜晚on a night in November
48.烧光 burn out
Unit 13 phrases
1.用……覆盖 cover with
2.把……与……相比 compare … to
3.给出新词的定义 define new words
4.把淡水装入杯子 fill one glass with fresh water
5.保护我们这个星球上的水
protect the water on our planet
6.把杯子翻转 turn the glass upside down
7.提出 come up with
8.对环境污染很敏感
be sensitive to environmental pollution
9.从中受益 benefit from
10.捉弄你 play a trick on sb
11.叫来警察 call in the police
12.温度降到零度以下
the temperature drops below 0℃
13.把温度提高1℃
raise the temperature by one degree centigrade
14.通过吸收和释放热量而保持稳定
keep steady by absorbing and giving off heat
15.对温度的巨变和突变很敏感be sensitive to large and sudden changes in temperature
16. 释放出大量的热 give off a lot of heat
17.分解固体和气体
break down both solids and gases
18.为其他生物所利用
become available to other living creatures
19.变成固体 turn into a solid
20.给……打电话 give sb a call
21.继续在该公司工作
continue working at this company
22.河流与大洋交汇where a river meets the ocean
23.每立米用公斤来衡量
be measured in kilograms per cubic metre
24.利用水的密度
take advantage of the density of water
25.能量 the amount of energy
Unit 14 phrases
1.获得诺贝尔和平奖
receive the Nobel Peace Price (for peace)
2.把..投入监狱put … into prison
3.动摇国家的基
shake the foundations of the nation
4.当农民 work as a farmer
5.与……交朋友make friends with
6.加入行动小组 join an action group
7.积极从事女权运动
be active in the women’s rights movement
8.给…发表演说 give a speech to sb
9.使他们闻名全世界
make him famous all over the world
10.为黑人的政治权利而战
fight for political rights for black people
11.为…树立榜样 set an example to sb
12.获得奖学金 win a scholarship
13.给他以…机会
give him the chance to do
14.要求社会改革
demand changes in society
15.通过和平手段达到目的
achieve that goal by peaceful actions
16.有选举权 have the right to vote
17.随意表达我们想说的
be free to say whatever we want
18.任何的时候 of all times
19.在现代 in modern times
20.同偏见作斗争
fight against prejudice
21.有共同之处 have in common
23.提出新观点的好方法
a good way to come up with new ideas
24.使读者吃惊 surprise your readers
25.作为平等公民对待
treat as equal citizens
26.被警察逮捕 be arrested by the police
27.生来就是奴隶 be born as a slave
28.携手 join hands
29.乍一看 at first sight
Unit 15 phrases
1.提供一张免费机票 offer a free air ticket
2.立刻对它进行调查 look into it immediately
3.第一次 for the first time
4.不时地 every now and then
5.庆百岁生日celebrate its one hundredth birthday
6.厌烦 get tired of
7.为期四天的节日 a four-day festival
8.尝试去……旅游 try a visit to
9.位于奥地利南部 located in southern Austria
10对……感到惊奇 be amazed by
11.没有必要担心there is no need to worry
12.广泛多样的娱乐
a wide variety of entertainment
13. 一饱眼福 a feast for the eyes
14.如果你有足够的精力
should you have enough energy left
15.在山村被扶养大
be brought up in a mountainous village
16.在城里经营小公司
run a small company in a city
17.我们在闲聊 we are chatting
18.吸引世界各地的游客
attract visitors from all over the world
19.到遥远的地方去旅行
go on a trip to a far-away destination
20.节约钱的好办法
a good way to save money
21.找到问题的答案
find answers to your questions
22.在两者之间选择
choose between different alternatives
23.喜欢自己安排
prefer to make their own arrangements
24.信用卡 credit cards
25.需要带些现金 need to bring some cash
26.兑换钱 exchange money
27.有经验的旅行者 seasoned travelers
28.留在家里 leave at home
29.在我们旅行的第一天
on the first day of our trip
30.旅行日记 a travel diary
31.做笔记 make notes of
32.为……留地方 leave room for
Unit 16 some phrases
1.被拒绝入美国
be refused entry into the USA
2.与……有关 connected with
3.伤口愈合很慢 be slow to heal
4.远远落后 far behind
5.从毁坏中恢复过来
recover from the destruction
6.目的是aim at
7.为悼念 in honour of
8.没有白费 be no in vain
9.为……而骄傲be proud of
10.奥运会的主办者
the host of the Olympic Games
11.骄傲地展示它的新形象
be proud to display its new image
12.下决心be determined to do
13.与老同学保持联系
keep in touch with his former classmates
14.对钱很贪婪be greedy for money
15.总工程师 the chief engineer
16.不同意他的观点 disagree with him
17.解决问题 solve the problem
18.出售 go on sale
19.大规模存在 exist in huge numbers
20.被迫做 be forced to do
21.抵制做 resist doing
22.靠……过活 live on
23.消失 die out
24.相反 in turn
25.对…有影响have an effect on
26.整个平原的野生动物链
the whole wildlife chain of the plains
27.以……结束 end up with
28.利用野牛 make use of the bison
29.列出相似与区别
list similarities and differences
30.补上 make up
Unit 17 some phrases
1.给每个人以…的机
give everybody a chance to do
2.过丰富多彩的生活 live a rich life
3.为社会做贡献 make a contribution to society
4.帮助残疾人 assist disabled people
5.合作以达到他们的生活目标
cooperate to reach their goals in life
6.鼓励某人做 inspire sb to do
7.实现他们的梦想 realize their dreams
8.克服困难 overcome difficulties
9.适应了自己的生活方式 adjust my way of life
10.习惯于 get used to sth/doing
11.同情残疾人 have sympathy for the disabled
12.在绘画方面有天分 be gifted in painting
13.阻止……做 prevent from doing
14.过正常的生活 live a normal life
15.照看自己 take care of herself
16.出席国际会议attend an international meeting
17.就……道歉 apologize for
18.尽你所能做得好
about being the best you can be
19.多方面的斗士 fighters in more than one way
20.给…以尊敬treat…with dignity and respect
21.改善生活质量 improve the quality of life
22.有同等接近…… have equal access to
23.进行调研 conduct a survey of
24.经常，有时 at times
25.保持积极的态度 keep a positive attitude
26.完成任务 complete a task
27.许多障碍 many obstacles
Unit 18 phrases
1.扔掉 throw away
2.发电 make electricity
3.厌烦 be tired of
4.给某人专利 give sb a patent
5.纵观历史 throughout history
6.提出观点 come up with ideas
7.有很多共同之处have much in common
8.有很高的智商have a high IQ
9.考虑那些有创造性的解决办法
allow for creative solutions
10.为某人提供provide sb with
11.被困住 get stuck
12.用尽可能多的方
in as many ways as possible
13.仍然不可见remain invisible
14.正如……一样 as with
15.一系列不同的尝试
a series of different attempts
16.了解到 be aware of
17.努力避免失败
try to avoid failure
18.手工地 by hand
19.把……换成 exchange … for
20.被难题困住 get stuck in a difficult problem
21.在音乐方面展示才华show his talent for music
22.与……相似 be similar to
23.明显不同于 be clearly different from
24.既然 now that
25.知道，追踪 keep track of
26.从中学习learn from
27.把..翻译成 translate…into…
Unit 19 some phrases
1.发生 take place
2.偿还债务 pay back the debt
3.偿清 pay off
4.在现代 in modern times
5.救命 save one’s life
6.做出重要决定
make an important decision
7.娶某人 marry sb.
8.与…… 结婚 be married to
9.就我所知 as far as I know
10.开始干 go about
11.对表示怜悯 have mercy on
12.尽力与…… 争论是无用的
it’s useless trying to argue with
13.希望 hope for
14.请坐 please be seated
16.使……就坐 seat sb/ oneself
17.根据 according to
18.撕毁文件 tear up the paper
19.准备做这事 prepare to do the deed
20.流血而死 bleed to death
21.准备好 be ready for
22.拥抱你一下 take you in my arms
23.宣判 pass your judgement
24.喜欢做 prefer to do
25.像往常那样 as usual
26.出海 be at sea
27.一个条件 on one condition
28.签协议 sign the agreement
29.我收到你的信 your letter reached me
30.站在我的立场 stand in my place
31.剥夺 take away from
32.任由…… 摆布 be at the mercy of
33.跪下 go down on one’s knees
34.讫求某人的怜悯 beg… for mercy
35.像生命一样宝贵 as dear to me as life
36.来找他帮忙 come to him for help
37.醒来 wake up
38.讲出实情 tell the truth
Unit 20 some phrases
1.很难找出来 be difficult to find out
2.度假 go on a holiday
3.对……好奇 be curious about
4.追溯到…… date back to
5.各种各样的理由 a variety of reasons
6.倾向于认为 tend to believe
7.平均 on average
8.经过……的距离 over a distance of
9.与……石头有关 link to the stones
10.就技术发展而言
in terms of technical development
11.武装冲突 armed conflict
12.通过学习贸易和文化交流
through trade and cultural links
13.在当地人的眼中
in the eyes of local people
14.知道 have knowledge about
15.穿着黑衣服 be dressed in black
16.把画钉到墙上
pin the picture to the wall
17.闻名于中国
become famous all over China
18.充当 serve as
19.古代 in ancient times
20.据信 It is believed that
21.挖出 dig up
22.热情接待 warmly receive them
23.占地……面积 cover a vast area of
24.神秘的宫殿 the mysterious palaces
25.弄清楚 make clear
篇8：高一Units 19-20(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
[教学目的]强化所学知识，温故知新，掌握一定的解题方法。
[教学重点]掌握重点词汇和短语。
[教学难点]同义词辨析
[重点词汇]：promise, pretend, offer, refuse, come out, include(contain), develop, describe, remove, support, cross, character, press, print, tie,
[重点词组]：pick up, agree to sth., lie to sb., throw away, call at, at the same time
enjoy doing, look down upon, to everyone’s surprise, find out, come out, cut…into, find out, the rest of., by doing sth., be+ adj.+ to do.
[重点句型和交际用语]：1. It seems that…. 6. I’m not sure.
2. I don’t think so. 7. Do you call that…?
3. That’s not fair. 8. How did… come out?
4. I believe…. 9. What’s the problem with…?
5. I guess…. 10. too+adj.+for sb./sth…(to do)
课时安排：第一课时：知识梳理
第二课时：词语归纳、拓展
第三课时：创新跨越训练
第四、五课时：《导学教程》练习
[重点语言点详解]
1. 1)agree with “同意,赞成” ，后接人或表示“意见；观点；看法”的词。
1>You’d better agree with your boss/her. 你最好还是同意老板/她的意见。
2>I completely agree with your views on this point. 在这一点上，我完全同意你的看法。
3>They don’t quite agree with my-methods(opinions,idea). 他们不太赞成我的办法。
>>agree with还可表示“与 一致”（气候，食物等）适合。
1>The verb must agree with the subject in person and number.动词在人称和数上必须与主语一致。
2>The climate here doesn’t agree with me. 这儿的气候我不适应。
2)agree to意为“同意 赞成”，后接表“提议；安排；计划”等的词。
1>Both of them agreed to my plan(proposal/suggestion) about the travel.
他们两个都同意我提出的关于旅行的计划（提议/建议）。
3)agree on“对 取得一致意见；在 方面同意或意见一致”，后常跟表具体的协议的文件、计划、行动等的名词。
1>Both parties agreed on the terms of the contract.双方就合同中的条款达成了一致意见。
4)agree to do sth.“同意做某事”
1>We agree to go there.
2>He agree not to attend the meeting.
5)agree + that表示“一致认为，同意”
1>We all agree that his idea is a fine one.我们一致认为他的主意不错。
2. cross
1)adj. 脾气不好的，易怒的
1>He has never heard cross words from his wife.他从妻子那里从没听见过气话。
2) vt. 跨过，穿过
1>If you cross the street alone, please be careful.你自己过马路，一定要当心。
3) n. 十字，十字架
1>The question is marked with a cross.那个问题被标了个十字。
3. pretend vt. + to do/that-clause（不定式和从句作宾语）
1>He lay down on the ground and pretended to be dead when the bear came near.
当熊走进时，他躺在地上装死。
2>She pretended not to have seen me when I saw her.
当我看到她时，她假装没看到我。
3>They pretended to be working hard when the old man entered the room.
当老人走进房间时，他们假装在努力工作。
4>I pretended not to know the secret.
我装着不知道这个秘密。
5>Before the enemy, he pretended that he didn’t know me.
在敌人面前，他假装不认识我。
6>Please don’t pretend that you know everything.
请你不要装着你什么都懂。
3．refuse vt. + n./pron./to do
1>She was sorry to refuse his invitation to the party.
她不好意思地拒绝了他发出的参加晚会的邀请。
2>He refused my help, and tried his best to do it himself.
他拒绝了我的帮助， 尽力自己干了起来。
3>they refuses to tell us their address and telephone number.
他们拒绝告诉我们他们的地址和电话号码。
4>I received an invitation yesterday but I refused to accept it.
昨天我收到了一份请贴， 但我拒不接受。
refuse+间接宾语+直接宾语
1>He refused me money.他不肯给我钱。
4．guess
1)动词guess 可直接带宾语，也可接at 介词短语，可接复合宾语或that从句。
1>Can you guess (at) the price?
2>Can you guess (at) his age?
3>I guess her to be over thirty.=I guess that she is over thirty.
注：习惯上在名词answer 或it前不用at。如：He guessed the right answer.（他猜出了正确答案。）You guess it.（你猜猜看。）
注：give a guess或 make a guess均表示“作一猜测”的意思。
2)guess 可用来表示“觉得”，“认为”，=think
1>I guess men’s hands and fingers are too big!
2>I guess it’s going to rain soon.
注：believe, suppose, guess, find, feel许多时候可接 that从句,在意思上相当于think。
5. character
1) a Chinese character意为“一个汉字”。
1>In the beginning (=At first) they used to carve Chinese characters on stones to record important dates in history.
起初他们常常把汉字刻在石头上以记载历史上的重要日子。
2) character表示小说、戏剧、电影等中的“人物，角色”。
1>I find all the characters in his new play amusing and interesting.
我觉得他着部新剧中的所有任务既逗人发笑又很有趣。
2>Jack was a remarkable character.杰克是个不寻常的人物。
3) character表示“特征”，“特性”。
1>What is the character of the chemical?这一化学物质有什么特性？
2>The two problems are quite different in character.
这两个问题在性质上是完全不同的。
4)character表示人的“性格”，“品质”。
1>He is a man of strong character.他是个性格刚强的人。
6. past
1) n.过去
1>He would like people to forget his past.
2)adj.过去的
1>The past week has been very interesting.
3)adv.（从旁）过去
1>They went past without noticing the board.
4)prep.过去，超过
1>It was five past eleven.
2>She is already past eighteen.
7. tie
1)tie to“捆，绑，拴”，也可引申为“约束，束缚”。
1>he tied the horse to the tree.
2>He is tied to his work all day.他整天都被工作缠着。
2)tie up“捆紧”；“绑起来”
1>Please tie up all these boxes.
2>The thief was tied up.
3) tie n.“领带，绳子”，也可引申为使人结合起来的某种“关系”。
1>He was wearing a red tie.
2>Please find me a tie to tie up all these books.
3)We are united by some invisible tie.我们被某种无形的纽带连结在一起。
8.invent
1)invent=create or design something not existing before，“发明”、“创造”
1>What happened before printing was invented? 在印刷术发明以前情况怎么样？
2>Edison invented the electric light. 爱迪生发明了电灯。
[注意]Invent指创造发明以前不存在的东西或方法，指发现不为人们所知但大自然实际存在的事物。
2)invent还可用来表示“虚构”或“捏造”一个情况，=make up or think of。
1>He invented an excuse for being late.他编造了一个迟到的借口。
2>The whole story was invented.整个故事都是虚构的。
9.press vt.& vi.按；挤；压
1>The shoe is pressing my toe.这只鞋挤我的脚趾。
2>If you want to start the computer, press this button.如果你想开电脑，请按此按钮。
3>The little boy pressed his nose against the shop window.
小男孩把鼻子紧贴在橱窗上。
4>He pressed my hand warmly when we met.我们见面时他热情地紧握我的手。
5>I don’t like shoes that press.我不太喜欢太紧的鞋子。
10.print vt. & vi.印，打上印记；印刷，付印，发表
1>The mark of the boy’s shoes is printed clearly in the mud.
哪个男孩的鞋印清楚地印在泥上。
2>That terrible accident was printed on my memory.那次可怕的事故牢记在我的心中
3>The top line of this page hasn’t been properly printed.这页上端一行印刷得不好。
4>This machine prints 2,000 pages in an hour.这部机器每小时印2,000张。
5>The new press prints rapidly.这台新的印刷机印得很快。
11.form
1)form v.“形成”、“建立”、“养成”的意思。
1>These pieces of bamboo or wood were tied together to form a book.
把这些竹片或木片系在一起就成了一本书。
2>A sentence is formed by putting words together in a proper order.
将单词以正确的顺序排列在一起就形成了一个句子。
3>Steam forms (is formed)when water boils.水一沸腾，蒸汽就形成了。
4>They formed(=set up) a trade union to organize all the workers.
为了把所有工人组织起来，他们建立了工会。
5>We have formed (=set up) a class for beginners in French.
我们成立了一个法语初级班。
6>His character was formed in his childhood.他的性格是从小养成的。
7>A good idea formed (was formed) in his mind.他脑子里有了一个好主意。
[注]form the habit of …=fall/get into the habit of…,在意思上接近。get used to…,表示“养成了习惯”。
He has formed the habit of taking notes in class.他已养成了上课记笔记的习惯。
2) n.“形状，形态”；“形式，方式”；“表格”。
1>Ice, snow and steam are different forms of water.冰、雪和蒸汽是水的不同形态。
2>This verb has two past forms.这个动词有两种过去时形式。
3>Please fill in the form in ink.请用钢笔填写这张表格。
搭配：take the form of…采取…的形式 in any shape or form无论什么形式
12.include
1)include vt. “包括”、“包含”
1>This plan includes most of your suggestions.这项计划里包括了你们的大部分建议
2>The group included two engineers and twenty workers.
这个队共有两名工程师和二十个工人。
[注] include +doing
My job doesn’t include making coffee for the boss.我的工作并不包括为老板煮咖啡。
2)including 作介词，后接名词、代词或名词性从句作宾语。 Included用作形容词，有被动含义，应放在名词/代词之后。试比较：
1>A lot people attended yesterday’s meeting, including 10 foreigners.
2>At least 20 persons got hurt, including 3 policemen.
3>All of us, Gary included, will make a trip to London next week.
13.by+doing “用……方式”、“凭靠……手段”
1>I make a living by teaching English at school.我以在学校教英语为生。
2>The boss has made a lot of money by selling building materials.
老板（通过）卖建筑材料赚了很多钱。
3>We can learn spoken English well by pactising speaking English a great deal both in and out of class. 通过课堂内外大量的讲英语训练，我们可以学好英语口语。
14.promise
1)vt. “答应”、“许诺”。
(1)promise+n./pron. promise sth., promise sb. sth.
1>He that promises too much means nothing.许愿太多的人是不打算兑现的。
2>I’m afraid I can’t promise you anything.恐怕我们什么也不能许诺给你。
(2)promise to do sth./promise sb. to do sth.
1>I never promised to obey her orders.我从未答应过要服从她的命令。
2>Promise me never to trouble me again.答应我决不再麻烦我。
(3)promise+that-clause,有时可带间接宾语。
1>He promised he would never do it again. 他答应以后再不这样干了。 2>He promised that he would pay back the money within two weeks. 他答应两周内还钱。
2)vi.
I’ll try to help him out, but I can’t promise.我将尽力帮助他，但我不能许诺。
3)link-verb, “预示着”、“有可能”
The clear sky promises fine weather tomorrow.请晴朗的天空预示着明天是个好天气
4.n. “诺言”，常作可数名词。
1>It’s easy to make a promise.许愿是容易的。
2>I’m sorry for having broken my promise.对不起，我食言了。
3>Give me your promise that you will never do it again.答应我以后再不那样干了。
[注]make a promise许诺, keep a promise遵守诺言, break a promise.违背诺言
15.too…for… 太过于
1>The dress is too small for me.
2>The question is too difficult for me.
3>The work was too much for him.
16.back to front穿反了
back to front是合成词，由“名词+介词+名词”构成，在句中作状语，如果词与词之间有连字符连接，相当于形容词。
The old man has on his sweater back to front.
联想：face to face 面对面的back to back背靠背的
side by side肩并肩的 hand in hand手拉手的
shoulder to shoulder肩并肩的 neck to neck齐头并进的，并驾齐驱的
相似词语辨析：
1. in surprise, to one’s surprise
1)in surprise意为“惊奇地”常位于动词之后作状语，表示方式。
1>John turned around and looked at me in surprise.约翰转过身来，惊奇地望着我。
2>“A farmer?” said the Frenchman in surprise.“农夫？”那个法国人惊奇地说到。
2)to one’s surprise /to the surprise of sb.意为“使人吃惊的是”、“出乎意料地”，常位于句首，作状语，表示行为的结果。类似的结构有：
to one’s joy/delight/pleasure使人高兴的是
to one’s sorrow使人悲伤的是
to one’s satisfaction使人满意的是
有时为了强调产生某种情感的程度，可在to 后面的名词前加great, deep 等形容词或在to前加副词much。
1>To the surprise of the young couple, they found the necklace missing.
使这对年轻夫妇惊奇的是， 他们发现项链不见了。
2>To their great joy, the sailors saw land at last. 水手们终于见到陆地了， 他们兴奋不已。
3>Much to my surprise, she failed in the examination.
使我非常奇怪的是，她考试没及格。
2. job, work, works,labour
1)job 常指具体一件工作，是可数名词。work泛指所有长期的或短期的需要体力或脑力的工作，是不可数名词，通常与job替换使用。如：
1>He did a lot of useful jobs/work.
2>I can not find work in this town.
3>Thousands of workers lost their jobs when the factory closed.
2)好的工作或特别困难的工作，习惯上用job,另外，quite a job也是表示特别困难的工作。如：
1>He has a good job in a bank.
2>It was quite a job (a difficult job) finding his lost child.
注：make a good/fine job of sth.做得好。
句型：look for a job寻找工作find a job找到一份工作ask for the job想要这份工作take the job接受这份工作
习惯用语：out of a job失业on the job工作着，忙碌着倒霉a bad(good)（幸运）事 do a job on sb./do sb’s job毁了某人
3)works 著作；作品 the works of Karl Marx卡尔*马克思的著作
The Complete Works of Lu Hsun 《鲁迅全集》works of literature and art文艺作品
>>works （建筑等）工程；[军]工事；[用作单或复数]工厂 e.g. public works公共建筑工程，市政工程the Ministry of Works 建筑工程部 defensive work(s) 防御工事 a cement works水泥厂
>>works活动的机件 e.g. clean the works of a clock擦洗钟的机件
>>works （神学用语）善行，德行
4)labour多指艰苦的、紧张的、劳累的体力劳动，也指脑力劳动。一般不用来指具体概念。如：
1>Labour creates the world. 劳动创造了世界。
2>He was well paid for his labour. 他干的活得到很好的报酬。
3. method, way, means
1>二者都可以表示“方法”。way是普通用语，指做事的方法，也可指思想方法，生活方式等。如：
<1>There’s only one way of doing this properly.
<2>The way she spoke hurt me.
<3>What is best way to make tea?
<4>That’s English way of living.
2) method 指系统的、具有一定理论性的方法，强调条理性和高效率。如：
>>method 后面可接to do sth./of doing sth.
<1>We must improve the method of teaching English.
<2>You should use different methods to solve different problems.
>>如果表达用什么方法，常用介词with或by搭配。
If you do it with this method, you’ll succeed.如果你用这种方法做，你会成功的。
>>way表示用什么方法时，常与介词in搭配而means则常与by搭配，也就是说in this way, by this means, with/by this method.
3. everyday, every day
1)everyday adj.常用作定语，意为“每日的；日常的”，如： everyday life（日常生活）,everyday English（日常英语）等。 2)every day是名词词组，常用作状语，意为“每天地；天天地”。
1>He can speak everyday English very well.
2>Teaching the students English is my everyday job.
3>I teach the students English every day.
4>The film is about American everyday life.
5>They go to school every day except Sunday.
[典型例题分析]
例1 I would love____ to the party last night but I had to work extra hours to finish a report.
A. to go B. to have gone C. going D. having gone
分析 此题中would love/like后须跟不定式，不接动名词作宾语，由此可排除C 、D。又 would love to do sth.表示现在或将来的愿望，显然与本题语境不符，因而排除A 。正确答案为B 。大意为：昨天晚上我本想参加那个晚会，但我不得不加班了几个小时来完成一份报告。would love to have done表示希望做但未能做成。
如：I’d like to have come over to see you last night, but someone called and I couldn’t get away.昨晚本想来看你，但有人找我，脱不开身。
例2 The house ____ doors and windows are all closed is for sale.
A. of which B. whose C. its D. that
分析 答案为B. 此题中的关系代词whose 指物，可与of which 替换，指人时可与of whom替换。如：
The new machine whose parts (=the parts of which) are too small to be seen is made in Shanghai.零件小得看不见的那部新机器是上海制造的。
>>如果用of which 代替题干中的whose,应写成：
The house the doors and windows of which are all closed is for sale.
门窗紧闭的那栋房子是出售的。
[高考真题选讲]
题1.She pretended _____ me when I passed by. (NMET89)
A. not to see B. no seeing C. to not see D. having not seen
分析 pretend后要跟不定式作宾语，不定式的否定形式是在 to 前加not。因此答案为 A 。
题 2 ---Do you think it’s going to rain over the weekend?
---_______.
A. I don’t believe B. I don’t believe it C. I believe not so D. I believe not
分析 本题答案为D。注意I believe not是省略形式，其完整的含义是I believe that it isn’t going to rain over the weekend.
题 3 ---_____ the sports meeting might be put off. (NMET95)
---Yes, it all depends on the weather.
A. I’ve been told B. I’ve told C. I’m told D. I told
分析 该题的考试目标是动词的时态和语态。从it all depends on the weather一句的时态和所告知的内容可以断定，应该用现在完成时的被动语态。答案为A。
题 4 _____ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.
A. There B. This C. That D. It (NMET95)
分析 在英语中为了保持句子平衡，常将较长的主语放在句尾（常由不定式短语或连接词引导的从句构成）。而将先行词it置于句首充当逻辑主语（或形式主语）。本题中真正的主语是that English is being accepted as an international language. 答案为D。
改错题： (carelessness)
1>He didn’t pass the driving test because of careless. After all, he is still a boy.
2>---How much does the book worth? ---$ 10. (is / worth-cost)
3>Do you still remember that afternoon when we spent together? (when)/-which/that
4>This is the girl his parents are both engineers. (whose)
5>He is ill in bed. Let’s go to call ^ him. (on)
6>To our surprises, he has got a good job in the company. (surprise)
7>At last the agreed with our suggestion about the work. (to)
8>He did do the work very well. That’s because he was praised. (why)
9>It’s very difficult of us to get there in time. (for)
10>The boy wanted to smoke, but his mother told him not ^. (to)
11>He gave me some informations on the computer. (information)
12>She is famous for her works and ^ a writer. (as)
13>Words written on animal bones are difficult to be read. ( be)
14>I’d like to be taking to the cinema to see the film. (taken)
15>---How long have you studied English? ---From 1990. (Since)
16>Now wood is used to making paper. (make)
对比填空：
1. job/work/works
1>In our factory he has a ____ as a cook. (job)
2>I have much ____ to do this evening. (work)
3>Teaching English at school is my _____. (job/work)
4>He’s been out of ____ for nearly two years. ( work )
5>The iron and steel ____ was closed for Christmas. (works )
6>The carved figure is an unusual ____ of art. (work)
2. included/including
1>A lot of students were praised at the meeting, Tom ___. ( included )
2>A lot of students were praised at the meeting, ___ Tom. ( including )
3>All kinds of food are ___ in the shopping list. ( included )
4>The rent is 70 dollars a month ___ water and electricity. ( including )
5>The price ____ postage then. ( included )
3. move/remove
1>He was ___ from his position as chairman. ( removed )
2>After entering the room, he ___ his hat and gloves. ( removed )
3>She ____the sofa to the corner. ( moved )
4>Don’t ___ about while I’m taking your phone. ( move )
5>What do you advise for ____ ink from my clothes. ( removing )
6>The audience were deeply ___ by the story. ( moved )
4. problem/question
1>The ____ is too difficult for him to answer. ( question )
2>The ____ is too difficult for him to work out. ( problem )
3>She couldn’t get the job, the ___ is that she’s a woman. ( problem )
4>---Can you make it that we must get there before 6 p.m.?
---No ______. ( problem )
5>There are many social ____ in America now. ( problems )
6>Last period our teacher ____ us on verbs. ( questioned )
单词拼写：
1. It’s impossible to stop the d_______ of society. (development)
2. He told all his friends about it, i_______ Jack. (including)
3. The wood f_______ tens of years ago. (formed)
4. I have never seen him and his name is also u_______ to me. (unknown)
5. The pot is made of m_______. (metal)
6. The farmers p_______ the oil from these beans. (pressed)
7. Wait a moment. The papers are being p_____ at present. (printed)
8. The teacher asked us to take out a s___ of paper and write words on it.(sheet)
9. The paper is made from fishing n________. (nets)
10. Is the ________ (发动机) made in China or in Japan? (engine)
篇9：Unit 1 单元标题(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
--湖北省应城市杨岭高中杨 柳老师
高考英语阅读理解的分值高达45分几乎占了整套试卷的三分之一。近几年高考阅读理解的阅读量呈逐渐扩大趋势，选项词量增加的幅度大于短文词量增加的幅度，且阅读速度进一步提高，整卷的考查重点是阅读材料，而阅读理解重点检测我们的语篇领悟能力，将测试的基本点定于语篇分析选材多样，突出实际运用，内容贴近生活，寓于交际，具有很强的思想性、时代性和实用性，涉及了社会文化、教育、科普、日常生活各个领域。
下面谈谈高考试题中的议论文的阅读技巧、方法
议论文，有论点，有事实。作者往往根据一些很普通的事实，通过严谨的思维，缜密的推理得出一个具有普遍性或指导性的观点。该类文章逻辑性强，命题往往从事实的有关细节以及文章的主旨或作者的表达意图等方面着手，考查我们的思维能力和判断能力。
英语文章讲究使用主题段或主题句。主题段通常在文章开头，简要概括文章的中心思想，主题句可能在一段的开头交待该段的中心意思，再由全段展开或讨论这个意思。主题句也可能在中间或末尾，由全段展开讨论后归纳总结出来。段与段之间常用词语连接，承上启下，使文章行文连贯，为了深化主题，作者可能用许多方法来写。议论文的阅读和其它体裁的文章阅读一样，可以有以下几种出题方式：1。主旨大意；2。细节理解；3。推理判断等；4。词义理解。
1．主旨大意题。主旨大意题是专门检查对短文整体理解程度的。每篇文章都有主题句表明其主题(中心)思想。常见的问题有：
(1) From the passage we know that ______.
(2) The best title of the passage should be ______.
(3) The main idea of the Paragraph is to _______.
(4) The main purpose of the passage is to _______.
(5) Which of the following best describes the main point of the passage?
在回答此类问题时，要找出文章的主题句，这些主题句常常在短文的开头或结尾处，在这两个地方很容易找到它们。那些错误的答案干扰项有的太笼统，有的则太具体，片面，不能恰当地反映短文的中心思想。
2．细节理解题。细节题主要是检查与主题思想有关的细节。常见的问题形式有：
(1) According to the passage, the author mentions _______.
(2) Which of the following does the author discuss?
(3) Choose the right order of the events.
细节问题询问的是作者说了些什么，其答案在本文中已明确表述过，此时最好的办法就是在文中找出相关的细节，虽然答案中有的细节在文中很清楚，但可能与问题无关。如果问题采用的是反向思维，题中含有not 或except等表示否定意义的词，则要更加注意。
3．推理判断题。推理判断题主要是提问那些在文中未说明，但已特别暗示的内容。题目的要求常是这样的：
(1) This article is particularly written for ______.
(2) The writer is trying to tell us ______.
(3) When the writer says----, he really means ______.
(4) The writer regards -----as ______.
(5) The writer’s attitude toward ----is _______.
做推理判断题时，要透过字里行间把握文章的真正内涵，客观地反映文章的思想，克服主观臆想。特别注意那些最能反映句子之间，段落之间的逻辑关系的连词。深刻而准确地把握文章 的重点内容。
4．词义理解题。英语词语的词意非常丰富，语境不同，词意也不同，要用心揣摩在上下文中的含义。常见的问题形式有：
(1) The author uses the word “……” to mean ______.
(2) According to the passage , “……” probably means _____
(3) The word “……” in paragraph ---- refers to _______.
(4) The underlined word “……” means ______.
(5) The underlined phrase “……” means _____.
词义理解题中的词往往一词多义，可以采用利用上下文中说话者的语气推测其意义；在特定的语境中，进行逻辑推理的方式也可以获得合理的信息。
总之，上述关于议论文阅读理解的方法与技巧看起来挺费时，但事实上相反，只要我们平时练习时多加注意，形成习惯，这种方法则会成为我们阅读理解最省时，最可靠的一种。
Text A
HONG KONG----Students from Hong Kong and Taiwan are clamoring(喧闹) for places in mainland universities following China’s accession to the World Trade Organization, a news report said on Monday.
The number of students from Hong Kong, Taiwan and Macao applying for postgraduate course on the Chinese mainland leapt(跃过)71.5 per cent in to 1,828, according the Hong Kong based South China Morning Post.
The number of Hong Kong students applying for degree places on the mainland has risen from 40 in 1992 to 252 last year, according to the territory’s (边境) examinations authority.
While the number of Taiwan applicants has exceeded(超过) 700, more than double last year，s total of 296, Xinhua reported.
The most popular universities are Beijing’s Peking University and Qinghua University, where US President George W. Bush delivered a speech to students on February 23, Jinan University in Guang zhou, Shanghai’s Fudan University and the Shanghai Medical University .
The newspaper quoted Deng Penghuai, head of School of International Education Tianjin University, as saying China’s WTO entry boosted(提高，促进)interest in Chinese universities in Hong Kong and Taiwan.
“ Many multinational(跨国的)corporations have entered or are about to enter the Chinese mainland,” he said. “They need people who know both sides of the world. Hong Kong and Taiwan students have advantage in this respect.”
“ So we see a lot of them now coming to the mainland to study. Many of them will then work for these companies on the mainland.”
1. The students from HK and Taiwan who come to study in mainland mainly ______ .
A. postgraduates B. university graduates
C. fresh-men D. middle-school students
2. More HK and Taiwan students have come to mainland for study mainly because ______ .
A. the territory examination is not out so strictly now
B. the mainland have more well-known universities
C. they want to help increase the understanding of the two sides
D. China’s entry of the WTO has provided more chances of employment
3. The rate of _______ students applying for degree places on the mainland increases the fastest.
A. Hong Kong B. Taiwan C. Macao D. Singapore
4. It can be inferred that after graduation some of the HK and Taiwan students will _____ .
A. come back home B. work in the mainland governments
C. settle down in the mainland D. stay and work in the multinational corporations
Text B
Have you ever wondered what you would look like if you were an Asian, Middle Eastern, black, white or Indian person? By stepping into the Human Race Machine, you can find out. When you sit inside it, the machine creates a digital image (数字影像) of your face. After pushing certain buttons, the machine uses various photos of people of a certain ethnic group mixed with your own facial features. From this, it can come up with an image showing how you would look as a member of a different race.
The machine is part of a traveling retrospective (回顾展) called “ Seeing and Believing: The Art of Nancy Burson.” Burson is a famous American photographer and inventor. The show of 100 photos and multimedia works was on view at the Grey ArtGallery in New York on April 20.
“ It is a strange feeling, just like stepping into someone else’s skin.” Said Hathy Zajchenko, a museum visitor from Pennsylvania, US. As soon as she sat down, she tried out a range of ethnic groups. “ The Middle Eastern image worked pretty well for me,” she said with a smile.
According to Burson, the machine is a prayer for unity. It is about seeing through differences to find the things we all share in common. Burson added the database (资料库) of Middle Eastern faces, both Arab and Jewish, after the terrorist attacks (恐怖袭击) on September 11. “ I have always wanted to allow people to see differently. I am a photographer. I am recording the unseen, because what we can not see is so much more interesting than what we can see,” Burson said.
For those who missed the show, the Human Race machine will be on view at the New York Hall of Science in the Queens district full-time as of June.
5. The Human Race Machine can ____ .
A. tell you what you would look like if you were a member of another ethnic group
B. create a digital image of your face and change it
C. turn your pray into reality
D. let people step into someone else’s skin
6. The phrase “ come up with” in the first paragraph means ____.
A. get nearer B. produce C. come out D. change
7. When Kathy Zajchenko said that the Middle Eastern image worked well for her, she meant that ____ .
A. she would like to change her face B. she had a strange feeling
C. she was satisfied with what she looked like as a Middle Eastern person
D. she could buy the Human Race machine
8. The sentence “ The machine is a pray for unity” means _____ .
A. the Human Race machine can unite the facial feather of a different ethnic group with your own
B. the machine shows that no matter what race people are , there are some things we all have in common
C. one can pray before the machine
D. if you want, the machine can change your face
9. Burson added the database of Middle Eastern faces after the September 11 attack because ____.
A. she wanted to show people what terrorists look like
B. she wanted to record what people can not see
C. she wanted to be famous as a photographer
D. she wanted to let people see the foreign people
Text C
SUNSHINE COMPANY
Products for a Safe Environment
A4277-HAND SOAP
You are going to love this natural soap. There are no chemicals in it. It is very good for your hands and face. D4545-GARDEN SPRAY
Insects are going to run away from our new chili garlic spray. It is safe and natural.
B2377-HOME CLEANER
You are not going to need 5 or 6 chemical cleaners. You have Dr Clean! It is safe and strong, and it cleans everything in your house!
A2104-CANVAS BAG
You are going to say, “ No paper or plastic!” You have this excellent heavy canvas shopping bag.
Item Code Price
Natural shampoo T6762 $3.00
Garden spray D4544 $2.50
Canvas bag A2104 $4.00
Hand soap A2477 $1.00
Home cleaner B2377 $2.25
Postage: $3.50
10. Dr clean is _______.
A. an expert in cleaning everything B. a newly-invented machine
C. a can of cleaning powder D. a magic cloth for cleaning
11. According to the ads, where can you mail your letter to if you want something to kill ants?
A. D4545 Garden Spray B. Sunshine Company
C. Safe Environment Product D. The Dr Clean’s
12. According to the ads. How much do you have to pay for three shampoos and two canvas bags totally?
A. $ 12.25 B. $ 20.50 C. $ 13.50 D. $ 17.00
Text D
Pat Brown went to her bank to ask for an ATM card. It looks like a credit card. A few weeks later, the bank posted her a card and a four number personal identification number (PIN) .Her PIN is 1234。
As Pat was getting ready for bed one night, she remembered that she had only＄2 in her bag. The next day she had go pay＄10 for a lunch for a co-worker. She didn’t want to get up early to go to the bank. So she went to the bank that night. She used her ATM card to withdraw (take out) ＄50 from her checking account.
These are the steps she followed to withdraw money. First, she put her card in the lower slot on the right side of the machine. She made sure her card was facing the right way. Second, the computer screen (window) said,“Please enter (put in) your PIN.”Pat pressed the numbers 1,2,3,4. Next the screed said,“Please select the type of transaction you want by pressing the correct keys.”Pat pressed the bottom key for withdrawing money.
Then the screen said,“From which account?”The choices it gave were “Checking”,“Saving”,and“Money market”.Pat pushed the key for “Checking”.Next, the screen said,“Please select (choose) amount of transaction.”Pat pushed the number“5”and then“0”three times, until the screed read,“50.00.”The scr5een then read,“Please wait.”In less than a minute , it read,“Please lift (rise) the lid and take your money.”
Pat lifted the lid marked“Withdraw”.She counted her $50 to make sure the ATM hadn’t make a mistake. Then she waited for her withdrawal slop to come out of the slot at the upper right corner of the machine. Pat checked the slip to make sure was correct. Then her ATM card was returned through the card slot. She put it in her bag and walked away. If Pat had made a mistake at any point by pressing the wrong button (number), she could have pressed “Cancel”and started over again.
13.What did Pat do immediately after choosing the account?
A. Selected whether to withdraw, deposit, of transfer money.
B. Lifted the lid and removed her money.
C. Selected the amount of money she wanted to withdraw.
D. Got back her ATM card.
14.When did Pat enter her PIN?
A. Right after inserting her card.
B. Right before selecting the account.
C. Right before selecting the amount of money.
D. Right after selecting withdrawal.
15.When did Pat enter her PIN?
A. Right after selecting which account she wanted.
B. Right before receiving her withdrawal slip.
C. Right before selecting the amount.
D. Right after recording her PIN.
16.What did Pat do when the screed said,“Please lift the lid …”?
A. Got out her card. B. Took her $50.
C. Selected the type of transaction she wanted.
D. Picker up her withdrawal slip.
Text E
One hundred new bookstalls that will sell newspapers as well as books have been making their debut on city streets since Saturday morning.
The newsstands are part of the city’s efforts to improve the appearance of streets and neighborhoods. The news-stands’ design, featuring large glass window, will help the customers to see what is on sale at a glance.
An electrical screen on the newsstands will announce immediately the arrival of the latest papers. The newsstands will also help collect utility fees. There will be 1,000 newsstands by the end of the year. The newly formed Oriental Books and Papers Service Co. Ltd will manage the stalls. According to sources from the company, over 80 percent of the people hired to operate the stands will be recruited from laid-off workers. This means the project will help ease the city’s unemployment pressure, sources said.
All recruited will undergo a training programme and be clad in green uniform. Municipal Vice-part Secretary Gong Xueping said the installation of the 100 stands was just the first step towards the objective of setting up 1,000 stands in the city by the end of the year.
He said the creation of the stalls would be of particular significance to the enhancement of the city’s spiritual civilization. He also made some suggestions regarding the location, design, and construction of the new stands, and the renovation of the existing newsstands.
17. One hundred new bookstalls are set up to _______ .
A. classify the bookstores B. beautify the streets and neighborhood
C. enrich people’s minds with knowledge D. increase people’s purchasing power
18. The newsstands are made of large glass windows to ______ .
A. beautify the streets B. differ from other shops
C. let the customers browse through what they want
D. reduce the expenses of the construction
19. Which sentence is not true?
A. The newsstands also help gather together other public service charges
B. The newsstands will make known the arrival of the current issue of paper.
C. These kinds of newsstands will widely set up.
D. The newsstands just sell newspapers and magazines.
20. What is the other purpose of building these newsstands? Give the laid-off workers a chance
to _______.
A. make a living B. take up hobbies
C. ease their pressure D. enrich their minds
Text A
1B。 因为是申请读研究生，所以这些申请人自然是大学毕业生
2D。 由第六段可以推出。
3A。 香港申请的学生增长了212人，增长率为530%，为三地最大。台湾增长率为50%，其他两地没提到。
4D。 从文中最后一句可知。
Text B
5A。从第一段后半部分可以推出
6B。当输入面部表情后，机器就会产生出一张照片。
7C。意思是如果作为中东人，她看起来最漂亮。
8B。无论是哪一种族人，总有些与其它人种相同之处的。
9B。这位摄影师想记录一些人们看不到的特征。
Text C
10C。 在B2377-HOME CLEANER中提到You have Dr Clean! It is safe and strong, and it cleans everything in your house!
11B。该表格是SUNSHINE COMPANY公司推出的产品
12B。这是一道计算题3*3+4*2=17， 17+3.5=20.5，别忘了加邮资
Text D
13C. 根据第一段第二段内容可知答案为C
14A。根据取钱步骤第一步和第二步，可知答案为A。
15D。PIN=person identification number, 结合第一段，故选D
16B。根据最后一段第一句可推出答案为B。
Text E
17B。 根据第二段to improve the appearance of streets and neighborhoods, 可以判断答案为B
18C。根据第二段 the newsstands’ design, will help the customers to see what is on sale at a glance. 可知答案为C。
19D。文章告知sell newspapers and books, 故D为错误。
20A。根据文章意思，创办这些报亭，可安排下岗人员再就业，提供谋生机会。
Text A
Art Exhibition: The 16th Asian International Art Exhibition from Dec.18, 2001 to jan.10, at the Guangdong Museum of Art.
The exhibition will highlight over 300 works from Japan, Korea, China Mainland, China HongKong, China Macau, Malaysia, Singapore, The Philippine, Indonesia and Australlia.
RMB 70,90,100
Booking Tel: 88677766
Concert: Christmas Concert performed by German organist Thorsten Macder and the Guangzhou Symphony Orchestra, conducted by Yu Feng.
RMB 80.120.180.230
8pm on Dec 23,
Symphony performing Hall. Guangdong Xinghai Concert Hall.
Booking Tel: 87352222
Hotel: Thailand cuisine festival: in the Greenery Café at Garden Hotel from Dec.20,2001 to Feb 20,2002.
Booking Tel: 87675443
Performance: The night between him and her
At Sun Yatsen Memorial Hall; 8pm on December 6,7,9
RMB 100,160,200,260
Tel: 89785656
21. The group of the advertisements are mainly on ______ in Guangzhou Morning Post.
A. sports B. business trade C. city life D. city guide
22. If you want to go to the concert with your two friends, you will at least carry ______ yuan with you.
A. 240 B. 160 C. 80 D. 190
23. The countries in the 16th Asian International Art Exhibition are all in Asia except ______.
A. Korea B. China Macau C. Indonesia D. Australia
24. If you want to enjoy yourself on December 7, you will probably dial the telephone number ___ ____.
A. 89785656 B. 87675443 C. 87352222 D. 88677766
Text B
Michael, a typical American, stays home on workday. He plugs into his personal computer terminal in order to connect with the office. After work he puts on his headphones, watches a movie on his home video recorder or plays baseball on the computer. On many days, Michael does not talk to any other human beings, and he does not see any people except the ones on television. Michael is imaginary, but his life style is very possible. The inventions of modern technology seem to be cutting us off from contact with our fellow human beings.
The world of business is one area which technology is isolating us. Experts say, for example, that many people will soon be able to work at home. With access to a large central computer, employees such as office clerks, insurance agents and accountants could do their fobs at display terminals in their own homes. They would never have to actually see the people they’re dealing with. In addition, the way employees are paid will change. Workers’ salaries will be automatically paid into their band accounts, making paper checks unnecessary. No workers will stand in line to receive their pay or cash their checks. Personal banking will change, too. Customers will deal with machines to put in or take out money from their accounts.
Another area that technology is changing is entertainment. Music, for instance, was once a group experience. People listened to music at concert halls or in small social gatherings. For many people now, however, music is an individual experience. Walking along the street or sitting in their living rooms, they wear headphones to build a wall of music around them.. Movie entertainment is changing, too. Movies used to be social events. Now, fewer people are going out to see a movie. Many more are choosing to wait for a film to appear on television or are borrowing videotapes to watch at home. Instead of laughing with others, viewers watch movies in their own living rooms.
25. The sentence,“Michael is imaginary, but his life style is very possible”means _______.
A. Michael is a person full of imagination and he can make his dreams come true.
B. Michael is not a real person but the life style does exist.
C. Michael has ambitions but he can’t make his dreams come true.
D. Michael is a person full of imagination and his style is common nowadays.
26. Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage?
A. Clerks will be able to work at home.
B. One can play baseball on the computer.
C. One can listen to music without disturbing others.
D. One can borrow books from libraries at home.
27. What will the author most probably discuss after the last paragraph?
A. Games and sports. B. Personal banking. C. Music and films.
D. International business.
28. What is the main idea of the passage?
A. We may no longer need to communicate with other human being.
B. Modern technology seems to be separating human being.
C. We any no longer need to work in the office.
D. Modern technology makes it possible for us to work and entertain ourselves at home.
Text C
The Internet is a system of electronic communication. It helps people share information, communicate with family and friends, and start businesses. But these people must have use for a computer, and know how to use it. And they must have a connection, usually through a telephone line or an Internet center. All of this costs money. For many poor people, a so-called“digital divide”exists. People who cannot connect to the Internet become poorer, while those who can become richer.
The United Nations is working to solve this problem. In December, it will hold a conference in Geneva, call the World Summit on the Information Society. Political and business leaders will come together will delegates from nongovernmental organizations, educational groups and others.
They will discuss the fast-growing information technology industry and its effects on the world.
UN organizers say they hope the gathering will lead to a political declaration and action plan. The goal is to bridge the digital divide between rich and poor nations. A second conference, to examine progress, will take place in Tunisia in .
UN Secretary General Kofi Annan recently spoke to business leaders at a meeting in New York. Mister Annan urged them to take part in the World Summit on the Information Society. He told them that industry can play an important part in limiting technological differences between countries. He noted that some companies already made efforts to improve Internet skills among poor Americans. The UN Secretary General urged businesses to also look for projects in developing countries.
Cisco Systems in San Jose, California, is one company that already does that. In , Cisco began a special program to teach Internet technology skills to people around the world. Today, the Cisco Networking Academy has spread to 145 nations.
Mister Annan says more ideals like this are needed to close the digital divide. He says information technology is not a magic answer for poor nations, but it can lead to peace and development. He says news and information provided through the Internet help build trade, employment, good government and democracy around the world.
29. According to the passage, the so-called “digital divide” here mainly refers to it that _______.
A. people in poor countries do not know how to use computers
B. the rich countries have more money than the poor countries
C. there is not Internet system in poor countries
D. as a result of economic factor, poor nations can not share information technology with rich nations equally
30. According to Kofi Annan, we can know ________.
A. without question information technology can provide a chance for the development of the world
B. all the business leaders will look for projects in developing countries
C. all the people in rich countries have mastered Internet skills
D. poor countries can have magic power on the Internet
31. Which of the following statements is NOT true?
A. The World Summit on the Information Society will be good news for developing countries
B. All the people with enough money can enjoy the Internet.
C. Perhaps there is a long way to go for the development of poor nations
D. The company Cisco has done a good job in teaching Internet technology skills to people around the world .
32. Which of the following can be the proper title for the passage?
A. The poor Becomes Poor, the Rich Richer
B. Digital Divide in Developing Nations
C. Meeting on Internet Technology
D. Internet Technology in Developing Countries
Text D
Will be the year of the first human clone? An Italian fertility expert says a patient will give birth to a cloned baby early next year but experts, including one who helped create Dolly, the sheep, are skeptical.
Dr. Senerino Antinori told a news conference in Rome on Tuesday that the cloned baby is due in January.
The maverick doctor gained fame nearly a decade ago when he helped a 62-year-old woman give birth following fertility treatment with a donated egg, but he has revealed few details about his latest project. All he would say was that the cloned fetus was healthy and weighed roughly 6 pounds.
Other experts in the field have grave doubts.
Cloning experts doubt Antinori or his unknown colleagues have the expertise to clone a human. Although sheep, mice and pigs have been cloned, scientists have not yet produced a carbon copy of any primate.
Antinori did not produce any evidence so scientists do not know if he has achieved anything or if he is just seeking publicity.
Dolly, the sheep was cloned using a technique called nuclear transfer. The nucleus of an egg cell was removed and replaced with the nucleus from a cell of the animal to be cloned.
It is a skilled and risky technique. Only a small percentage of clones result in pregnancies(怀孕) and there is a high percentage of miscarriages (流产) and deformities (畸形).
Even animal clones that look healthy may have genetic abnormalities (变态) or be predisposed (偏向于) to a decreased life span because the cell used in the cloning process acquire DNA damage as they age.
Antinori has not given any clues about how the human embryo was cloned nor who the progenitor, the person who has been cloned, is. “ We will wait and we see what the DNA studies show if a baby is born.” One of the experts said, “ I just hope it will not have abnormalities.”
33. What is the best title for this passage?
A. Scientists Welcome Birth of Human Clone
B. Scientists Doubt Birth of Human Clone
C. Dr. Severino Antinori, the Great Cloning Expert
D. The First Human Clone Is Coming
34. From text, we know that the writer ________.
A. is sure the cloned baby is due in January
B. is not sure whether the cloned baby is due in January
C. is glad the cloned baby is due in January
D. feels sorry the cloned baby is due in January
35. The underlined word “ skeptical” probably means ________.
A. believable B. doubtful C. certain D. excited
36. Experts doubt Antinori because ________.
A. he is just seeking publicity
B. he has revealed few details about his latest project
C. he does not have the expertise to clone a human
D. they are not sure whether he has the expertise
Text E
In one very long sentence, the introduction to the United Nations Charter (宪章) expresses the idea and the common aims of all the peoples whose governments joined together to form the United Nations. “ We the people of the UN determined to save succeeding generations from the scourge of war, which twice in our lifetime has brought untold suffering to mankind, and to reaffirm (重申) faith in fundamental fights, in the dignity (尊严) and worth of human person, in the equal rights of men and women and of nations large and small, and to establish conditions under which justice and respect for obligations arising from treaties (条约 )and other sources of international law can be maintained, and to promote social progress and better standards of life in large freedom, and for these ends, to practise tolerance (宽容) and live together in peace with one anther as good neighbours, and to unite our strength to maintain international peace and security, and to ensure, by the acceptance of principles and instruction of methods, that armed force shall not be used, save (except) in the common interest, and to employ international machinery for the promotion of economic and social advancement of all peoples, have resolved to combine our efforts to accomplish these aims.”
The essential functions of the UN are to maintain international peace and security, to develop friendly relations among nations, to cooperate internationally in solving international economic, social, cultural and human problems, promoting respect for human rights and fundamental freedoms and to be a center for coordinating the actions in attaining these common ends.
No country takes precedence over anther in the US. Each member’s rights and obligations are the same. All must contribute to the peaceful settlement of international disputes, and members have pledged to refrain from the threat or use of force against other states. Though the US has no right to intervene in any state’s internal affairs, it tries to ensure that nonmember states act according to its principles of international peace and security. UN members must offer every assistance in an approved UN action and in no way assist states against which the UN is taking preventive or enforcement action.
37. The first stated aim of UN was _______.
A. to assist the developing countries
B. to prevent a third world war
C. to revise international law
D. to watch and direct peace treaties
38. Under its Charter, the UN guarantees (保证)________.
A. never to use arms
B. better standards of life
C. to promote economic and social advancement
D. to employ international machines
39. The basic functions of the UN ________.
A. are including coordinating actions where necessary
B. B. are only concerned with human fights
C. Are economic and cultural
D. Are limited to discussions and debates
40. A country’s native politics ______.
A. are often changed by the UN
B. must be controlled by the UN
C. are not allowed to benefit from UN advice or assistance
D. can not be changed by force by the UN
21D。这是广汌早报上的一篇城市指导栏目的内容
22A。文中谈到去看concert单人票至少是80元，三人得240元。
23D。文中谈了亚洲的几个国家，但没有谈到Australia.
24A。文中有 “At Sun Yatsen Memorial Hall; 8pm on December 6,7,9”.所以选 A。
25B。文章中谈到的Michael是想象出来的，但他的生活方式在今天的电脑时代是存在的。故最佳答案是B
26D。文章中谈到了A，B，C选项中的事情，故最佳答案是D
27A。文章中谈到了B，C选项的事情，接下来作者最有可能谈A项中的事情，文章 中主要谈现代科技对个人生活方式的种种影响，故排出D
28B。文章 第一自然段中提到The inventions of modern technology seem to be cutting us off from contact with our fellow human beings. 此句是全文的中心，故最佳答案是B
29D。语义理解题。通读全文可知，“数字化差别”指经济上的落后导致的发展中国家与发达国家在网络通讯技术上的差距。
30A。细节理解题。从最后一段安南的话可知，网络的发展有助于世界的贸易，就业，民主发展，因此选A。他只是敦促商界到发展中国家去投资，并没有说他们都会去做(B)，C项中并没有提到。
31B。综合判断题。从文中B项不对，文中说网络的发展需要钱，说需要电脑并懂得使用，但没有说有钱人都能享受网络，因此选B。
32C。主旨判断题。全文讨论发展中国家在网络通讯方面与发达国家的差别，并讨论着手解决这一问题。
33B。全文针对克隆人类的观点进行阐述。
34B。从最后一段可推出。
35B。从第一自然段来分析这个问题还尚待解决。
36D。从第五段可推出。
37B。全文讲述联合国宪章与宗旨，有一定的难度，但各题在文中都能找到 supporting sentence. 本题是细节判断题。第二句提到建立UN的初衷，其后有“ 拯救后代不受战争蹂躏，它已两次给人类带来难言的灾难”，从中可以判断选B，其它三部分没有提到。
38C。推理判断题。第一段说UN除了共同利益之外不用武力，促进社会进步和提高生活水平，为了促进各民族社会经济的发展而动用国际机构，由此判断选C是目的，而D只是为达到目的的采取的手段。
39A。主旨大意题。第二段提到UN的功能：保证国际和平与安全，发展国家间的友谊，共同合作解决国际经济，文化，社会，人权问题，以人权与为自由为中心协调行动达到目的，从中分析，A为正确答案。
40D。 推理判断题。第三段说任何国家不能凌驾于其它国家之上，UN也无权干涉他国内务，但所有非成员国也必须以世界和平与安全为宗旨。
篇10：高三阅读理解训练(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
A Magnesium(镁) is another mineral we now get by collecting huge amount of ocean water and treating it with chemicals, although man first got it from the treatment of rocks. In a cubic mile of seawater there are about four million tons of magnesium. Since the means used to get magnesium was developed about 1941, production has increased a great deal. It was magnesium that made possible the wartime growth of the plane industry, for every plane made in the United States (and in most other countries, too) has about half a ton of magnesium metal. And it has many uses in other industries where a lightweight metal is most wanted, besides its long-standing utility (效用) as a material that does not carry electricity, and its use in printing inks and medicine.
1. What was the paragraph about which this passage follows?
A. The place where magnesium was found. B. Unusual qualities of magnesium.
C. A different mineral collected from seawater. D. The use of chemicals in treating seawater.
2. What is the main topic of this passage?
A. Uses of seawater. B. Treatment of seawater.
C. Chemical qualities of magnesium. D. Sources and uses of magnesium.
3. The new means of getting magnesium directly led to ______.
A. the development of using seawater B. increased plane production
C. improved medicine D. the development of cheap ink for printing
4. Why is magnesium important to industry?
A. It is strong. B. It conducts(传导) heat well. C. It weighs little. D. It is inexpensive to produce.
5. During the past fifty years the demand for magnesium has _______.
A. slowed down greatly B. remained the same C. increased slightly D. risen greatly
B The sky usually looks light blue. But if you went to the top of the highest mountain, went to the top of the highest mountain, where there is less air between you and the sun to scatter the sunlight, the sky would be deep, dark blue. And if you rode in a rocket high above the earth, where there is no air at all to scatter the sunlight, the sky would be so dark that it would be black.
Sometimes the sky doesn't look blue. At sunrise and sunset, the light from the sun sometimes is scattered in such a way that you see red, orange, and other colors in the sky.
1. The sky usually looks light blue because _____.
A. the sun is light and blue B. the air is light and blue
C. the air scatters the sunlight D. the sunlight is blue
2. The sky looks dark blue when _____.
A. there is less air between you and the sun B. there is high mountain
C. the mountain is highest D. you climb a mountain
3. The sky looks black if ______.
A. you ride in a rocket B. the rocket is high in the sky
C. the rocket is high above the earth D. there is no air to scatter the sunlight
4. Sometimes the sky doesn't look blue because ______.
A. the sun is rising B. the sun is setting
C. the air has different colors D. the light from the sun is scattered in a different way
5. A good title for this passage would be _______.
A. The Sky Looks Blue B. Why the Sky Looks Colorful
C. The Beautiful Sunlight D. Something About the Air
C More and more often we heard of people talking about Karaoke(卡拉OK). But what on earth it is about, still remains a question for many people.
Karaoke is a sort of acoustic equipment(音响设备) which was invented in Japan around the middle of the 1970's. It means “a band without people” in Japanese. In fact, it is just a music tape without words. This equipment first appeared in some public houses and snack bars (快餐店), and mainly for the customers to enjoy themselves. Most of the music in Karaoke was popular music. Therefore, at times, when anyone felt like it, he might sing songs to the accompaniment (伴奏) of the music that came from the equipment.
Shortly after its invention, Karaoke was spread (流传) to the whole world. It was introduced to China and was welcomed by many people. Although you are not a good singer, or even sometimes you may sing out of tune, you can always enjoy yourself by singing Karaoke.
1. In this passage “band” means “group of persons ________.”
A. who play games on the sports ground B. who play music together
C. living in the same neighbourhood D. doing things together under a leader and with a common purpose
2. Karaoke is just a ______
A. cassette tape with only music B. cassette tape recorder
C. band from Japan D. voice recording equipment
3. People went to public houses and snack bars ______when Karaoke appeared.
A. to have a good time B. to have something to drink
C. to get something to eat D. to buy the equipment
4. Karaoke was spread to the whole world ________.
A. as soon as it was invented B. long before C. not long after it was invented D. before long
5. The main idea of this passage is ______.
A. all persons like to play Karaoke B. to introduce Karaoke to the people
C. Karaoke is a wonderful equipment D. Karaoke is used everywhere including snack bars
D Beijing's sky watchers will no doubt be excited when they see with their own eyes a bright comet (彗星) all night long. Comet C/ B2 (Hyakutake) was first observed by Hyakutake, a Japanese amateur astronomer, on January 30, 1996. It can be seen with the naked eyes over China, Europe and other northern areas as nightly through the last week of March and first ten days of April. On March 25, it was closed to the earth--about 15 million kilometres or one-seventh the distance between the earth and the sun.
What is more exciting is that there will be two more rare events in the sky, it is predicted (预言) that another comet, Hale-Bopp, found on July 23, 1995, by Americans Alan Hale and Thomas Bopp, is expected to pass over the northern part of Heilongjiang Province in March 1997. The comet, estimated to be 10X15 kilometres in size, will not return for 3000 years.
What is even more rare is that a total solar eclipse(日蚀) is expected to occur on March 9, 1997, over Mongolia, Siberia and Northern Heilongjiang Province. When the sky turns dark, people should be able to see the eclipse and the bright comet Hale-Bopp at the same time.
An observation trip to Mohe, Heilongjiang Province, is being organized for the March1997 Sky events, as well as a nationwide astro-photo competition.
March 29-31, 1996 Weekend
1. Beijing sky watchers will be excited because _______.
A. they have observed a comet by themselves
B. they expect to see the comet found by a Japanese amateur astronomer through telescope
C. they expect to see with their naked eyes the comet found by Hyakutake
D. they will see a comet through a telescope for the first time
2. The two more exciting and rare sky events will occur in March, l997 are ______.
A. comet Hale-Bopp and comet Hyakutake B. a comet and a lunar eclipse
C. a comet found by two Americans and a solar eclipse D. a solar eclipse and comet Hyakutake
3. Which of the following statements is not true?
A. Comet Hale-Bopp and Comet Hyakutake will pass over the northern part of Heilongjiang Province in 1997. B. March 25 was supposed to be the best time to observe Comet Hyakutake.
C. A total solar eclipse will occur in Mongolia.
D. A nationwide astro-photo competition will be organized in March, 1997.
4. According to the newspaper article we learn that Hyakutake ______.
A. is an expert in astronomy B. works as an astronomer
C. has a great interest in astronomy D. is made to observe comets in the sky
E Collecting coins (or numismatics to the more seriously minded) is one of the world's popular hobbies. Although you can begin collecting coins at any age, most mumismatists will recall their hobby being stimulated in childhood. My interest was kindled as a ten-year-old child when I was presented with a small tin of old coins by the boyfriend of an elder sister. I wasn't rich all of a sudden but I was certainly impressed by possessing objects that were so many times older than myself. Such is the fascination of coins for old and young alike.
Many people are astonished to hear that coins issued before the birth of Christ-representing sixty generations of human life--can be bought for just a few dollars. Owning something which has literaly passed through the hands of so many of our ancestors (祖先) is instantly appealing. When such a coin is not only rare but beautiful, it is not surprising that collectors will pay thousands of dollars to own it. Australia's own coins, although so much more recent than, say, Roman coins, can still be very valuable. For example, in March 1992 an Australian 1920 sovereign was sold for $287,000 at a London auction.
Coins speak to us from the past. If we care to study them we can learn more about how our ancestors used to think. But perhaps most interestingly, we can discover how people dealt with one another. Basically, coins represent the value put upon objects which we own and want to trade, now or at some future date. We can call this complex system currency(货币).Australia, like few other countries in the world, can trace its history through its currency.
1. The word closest in meaning to “was kindled” as it is used in the passage is ____.
A. begin B. dived C. filled D. went
2. If something is “instantly appealing” it is ______.
A. wildly exciting B. immediately pleasing C. invariably interesting D. strangely curious
3. Australia's coins can be valuable even though _______.
A. they have been passed down through generations B. they are not very old
C. the currency has changed D. the currency system is complex
4. The author feels that numismatics goes beyond mere collecting as it offers the hobbyist _____.
A. an understanding of the past B. eventual wealth
C. opportunities for overseas travel D. the chance to collect extremely old coins
5. According to the passage which of the following statements is TRUE?
A. Coin collecting has always been an expensive hobby.
B. Numismatics appeals to both children and adults.
C. Coins were not issued before the birth of Christ.
D. Australia is unique in that it can trace its history through coins.
F Like most people your intelligence (智力) changes from season to season. You are probably a lot sharper in the spring than you are at any other time of the year. A well-known scientist, Ellsworth Huntington, concluded from other men's work and his own among peoples in different climates(气候) that climate and temperature have a clear effect on our intelligence.
He found that cool weather is much better for creative (创造性) thinking than warm weather. This does not mean that all people are not so quick at learning in the summer as they are during the rest of the year. It does mean, however, that the intelligence of large numbers of people seems to be lowest in the summer.
Spring appears to be the best period of the year for thinking. One reason may be that in the spring man's intelligence is effected by the same factors (因素) that bring about great changes in all nature.
Autumn is the next-best season, then winter. As for summer, it seems to be a good time to take long holidays from thinking!
1. Huntington decided that climate and temperature have _____.
A. some effect on most people's intelligence
B. a great effect on everyone's intelligence
C. a great effect on the intelligence of those living in a hot climate
D. a deep effect on the intelligence of those living in a hot climate
2. One possible reason why spring is the best period for thinking is that ______.
A. it is the first season of the year B. it lasts longer than the other seasons
C. it has more sunny days than rainy days D. it is good for the growth of all nature
3. We may conclude that Huntington ________.
A. invented many things after he had drawn the conclusion
B. joined some other men research work
C. drew the conclusion only from his own experience
D. got support his work from peoples in different climates
4. Which of the following is the right order from the worst period to the best period of the year for
thinking? A. Summer--winter--autumn--spring. B. Spring--autumn--winter--summer.
C. Summer--autumn--winter--spring. D. Spring--summer--autumn--winter.
5. Which title best gives the main idea of the passage?
A. The Seasons of the Year. B. Climate and Temperature.
C. Intelligence and the Seasons. D. Great Changes in Nature.
G For thousands of millions of years the moon has been going round the earth. During this time, the moon has been the only satellite of the earth. Today, however, the earth has many other satellites all made by man. These man-made satellites are very much smaller than the moon. However, some of them will still be going round the earth thousands of years from now.
Man-made satellites do not fall because they are going too fast to do so. As they speed along, they tend(倾向) to go straight off into space. They pull out of the earth, or its gravity, which keeps them from doing this. As a result, they travel in an orbit round the earth.
If a man-made satellite travels about a certain height, it can keep going on and on round the earth, just like the moon. This is because it is above the atmosphere, and there is nothing to slow it down. If it travels lower than that it will be slowed down so much that it will fall to the earth.
Men have sent spaceship to the moon and to the two nearest planets Mars (火星) and Venus (金星). By putting a camera on board of the spaceship to the moon, men have been able to take photographs of the other side of the moon. This side is always hidden from us as the moon circles the earth. The photos were later transmitted(传送) by radio to the earth. They showed that the other side of the moon is very much the same as the side that is turned towards us.
1. The moon is ______ the other satellites of the earth in size. A. much smaller than B. much bigger than C. less bigger than D. as big as
2. Man-made satellites travel in an orbit round the earth because _____.
A. they travel at a high speed B. they are very light in weight
C. the earth's gravity keeps them from going straight off into space D. both A and C
3. If a man-made satellite travels in the atmosphere, it will _______.
A. go straight off into space B. fall to the earth C. circle the earth forever D. both A and C
4. Photos show that the side of the moon hidden from us is _____ the side facing us.
A. brighter than B. different from C. the same as D. more beautiful than
5. We can only see one side of the moon because _______.
A. the moon has no gravity B. the moon keeps going round the earth
C. the moon goes side by side with the earth D. we haven't put a camera on board of the spaceship 新闻A Guangzhou (Xinhua)--12 people were killed and 20 injured early yesterday morning when they jumped from a burning train car into the path of an oncoming goods train in Southern China.
When No. 247 Wuchang--Guangzhou passenger train was passing the Dayaoshan Tunnel (隧道) in Guangdong Province, South China at 00 ：17 hours yesterday, a fire caused by passengers' smoking broke out on No. 17 car. They wanted to extinguish(扑灭) fire. As the train stopped some frightened passengers jumped from windows.
12 people were crushed to death and 20 others injured by a northward passing goods train(No. 1766).
1. In which direction did the passenger train travel? A. Norhtward. B. Southward. C. Eastward. D. Westward.
2. When did the accident happen?
A. At 00:17 am. B. At 00:17 pm. C. At seventeen past one. D. At seventeen to one.
3. Where did the accident happen?
A. In Wuchang. B. In Guangzhou. C. In Hubei. D. In Guangdong.
4. For what did the passenger train stop?
A. To put out the fire. B. To let the passengers jump out.
C. To let the other train pass. D. To pick up some other passengers.
5. What was the cause of the fire?
A. A heavy rain. B. High temperature. C. Carelessness. D. Fear.
B * Zhu to attend Asem in London
China's new premier, Zhu Rongji is to
attend the Second Asia-Europe Meeting
(Asem) and visit Britain and France
between March 31 and April 7 in his first
foreign trip since taking office.
--Page 2
* Laid-off (下岗 ) workers
Beijing will take measure to help the
city's laid-off workers find new jobs this
year.
-- Page 3
* Family reform
China Daily carries a commentary (评论)
on family planning policy, which is crucial
(关系重大) to the country's future.
--Page 4
* Banking reform
The Shanghai branch of the People's
Bank of China is preparing to initiate
（开始着手）a series of reforms to improve
services.
-- Page 5
* Education reform
A complete reform in Chinese language
teaching is called for in primary and
secondary education.
--Page 9
* Healthy old man
Two Chinese World War II pilots keep
healthy in their 80s through regular
exercise programmes.
--Page 10
1. The above section may possibly appear on _____ of China Daily.
A. Page 3 B. Page 1 C. Page 4 D. Page 5
2.. From the headline we expect there will be _____ job chances for laid-off workers in Beijing this year.
A. fewer B. enough C. more D. no
3. Premier Zhu will go to Europe to ______.
A. attend Asem in Paris B. visit Britain and France from March to April
C. have his first foreign tripD. attend the meeting and pay an official visit to Britain and France as well
4. We can infer(推断) that Chinese language teaching in primary and secondary schools at
present _______. A. is satisfactory B. meets the demand of the society
C. needs improvement D. interests students
C Are you interested in the following courses? Please read them and make a decision soon.
A. Understanding Computers
This twelve-hour course is for people who do not know very much about computers but who need to learn about them. You will learn what computers are, what they can and can't do, and how to use them.
Course Fee(费): $75 Jan. 7, 14, 21, 28 Sat. 9-11:50 a.m. Equipment Fee: $10.
Joseph Saunders is Professor of Computer Science at New Urban University. He has over twelve years of experience in the computer field.
B. Stopping Smoking
Do you want to stop smoking? Have you already tried to stop it but failed? Now is the time to stop smoking using the latest methods. You can stop smoking, and this twelve-hour course will help you do it.
Course fee: $30Jan. 4, 11, 18, 25 Mon. 4-7p.m.
Dr. John Goode is a practising psychologist (心理学家 ) who has helped hundreds of people stop smoking.
C. Typing(打字)
This course is for those who want to learn to type, as well as those who want to make their typing better. The course is individualized(单独授课). You are tested in the first class and begin practising at one of eight different skill levels. This allows you to learn at your own speed. Each program lasts 20 hours. Bring your own paper.
Course Fee: $125 Materials Fee: $25
Two hours each evening for two weeks. New classes begin every two weeks.
This course is taught by a number of best business education teachers who have successfully taught typing courses before.
1. The typing course is for
A. beginners B. skilled typists C. unskilled persons D. both A and C
2. If one wants to learn basic computer program, he must pay
A. $75+$10 B. $50+$10 C. $30+$25 D. $35+$25
3. Everyone taking a typing course can _____.
A. work at his own speed B. type fast
C. learn much more than the others D. begin practising at the same level
D Dear editor,
You can find language pollution whenever you open a newspaper or turn on your TV set, listen to a popular song at various advertisements. Language pollution exists almost everywhere and can be seen in the following places:
1. Chinese characters are written in the complex(复杂的 ) form. Although simplified (简化的) Chinese characters were accepted for use many years ago, it seems that more and more people like Chinese characters written in the complex form.
2. Many goods are produced in China but carry foreign names, which sound strange and have no meaning at all.
3. Words and expressions being used have a bad meaning. “Ba”(霸), which means bully in Chinese, is one example. Now there are a lot of goods, restaurants, even factories or firms, with “Ba” in their names.
4. There are too many incorrect grammatical expressions. Some films have strange names and incorrect grammatical structures(结构). “Al ni mei shang liang', which means ”I love you without consulting“, is grammatically incorrect and this kind of expression is now becoming popular.
Some language experts point out that language pollution must be done away with, which
is an idea shared by myself and many others. Fan Yongqian, Shanxi
1. The writer of the letter suggests that ______.
A. something be done to make our language pure (纯正)
B. the Chinese language not have the word ”ba“
C. everything have a good name and a good meaning
D. everybody try their best to stop pollution
2. What the writer wants to say is that ____.
A. great difference exists between the Chinese characters written in the complex form and simplified
form
B. our newspapers, TV programs, pop songs and advertisements are getting polluted
C. many people agree with the experts on language pollution in China
D. some film writers haven't studied Chinese grammar
3. The expression ”do away with“ in the last paragraph means ”_______\".
A. clean B. recycle C. get away D. end
4. What do you guess Fan Yongqian is? He or she probably is _____.
A. a language expert B. a singer of pop songs C. a reader D. an expert of grammar
5. Choose the best title for the passage.
A. More Attention to Grammar B. Pollution of Our Language
C. Experts' Good Advice D. Films with Strange Names
E A Help Wanted Advertisement Female Clerk Wanted
Interesting & Rewarding Position in Lee Garden Hotel, Aged 20-22, at least 2-year working experience, Salary according to experience will be between RMB 500 yuan and RMB 800 yuan per month. Transport can be provided from Town Centre. 5 days-40 hours/week plus other fringe benefits including shopping discount. Please contact Miss Li at 8491879.
1. According to the advertisement, Lee Garden Hotel wants to employ
A. women clerks who have been working for at least two years
B. men clerks aged from twenty to twenty-two
C. university graduates aged 20-22 D. middle school leavers aged between twenty and twenty-two
2. The employees in Lee Garden Hotel have to work ______.
A. from morning till night B. all day long without a rest
C. from Monday to Friday D. from Monday to Saturday
3. The newly-employed clerks ______ to be paid 500 yuan and 800 yuan monthly.
A. are considered B. are suggested C. are promised D. are allowed
F Many people think it is safer to fly in a plane around the world than to cross a busy city
street. Flying accidents are not very common; so when an air accident happens, the
newspapers put it on the front page. Look at the newspaper headline below:
GIRL FALLS 3000 METRES--AND LIVES TO TELL THE STORY!
1. According to the writer, why is an air accident usually reported on the front page of the newspaper?
A. Because flying accidents happen more often than car accidents.
B. Because air accidents rarely happen in our daily life.
C. Because flying is more dangerous than driving. D. Driving is more safer than flying.
2. Which of the following is not true?
A. The girl was 3000 metres up in the air before the accident happened.
B. The girl told the story about the accident to the news reporter.
C. The girl was the only passenger on board the plane who was alive after the accident.
D. The girl was so lucky that she was not killed in the accident.
A.CCDCD B.CADDB C.BAACC D.CCAC E. ABABB F. BDDAC G. BDBCB
A. BADAC B. BCDC C. DAA D. ACDCB E. ACC F. BB
篇11：高考复习--人教版高三Unit5-8 语言点(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
Unit 5
1 consideration
n. 重要性
n.考虑[U][(+for/to)]
That matter is under consideration.那件事正在考虑之中。
Before writing your answers please give careful consideration to the questions.
请在回答之前仔细考虑一下问题。
需要考虑的事;动机,原因[C]
Price and quality are the two chief considerations.价格和质量是两个主要考虑的问题。
体贴;关心[U][(+for)]
He showed no consideration for his wife.他不体贴他的妻子。
习惯用语
be under consideration在考虑中
give one's careful consideration加以慎重考虑
in consideration of考虑到， 由于;以作...的谢礼， 酬劳
leave out of consideration没有考虑， 忽略
on no consideration决不
out of consideration for出于对...的考虑； 体谅
take into consideration把...考虑进去
the first consideration第一要件， 头等要事
under no consideration不假思索， 轻率
2 charge vt.索价;对...索费;课(税)[(+for)]
This store often charges only 65 US cents a dozen for large eggs.
一打大鸡蛋在这家店里常常仅卖六十五美分。
把...记入帐册,赊购[(+to)]
Don't forget to charge the money of the shoes to my account.
别忘了把鞋钱记在我帐上。
控告,指控[(+with)]
He was charged with stealing.他被控犯有偷窃行为。
指责;谴责 [+that]
The statement charged that their actions violated the agreement.
声明指责他们的行为违背了协定。
将(电池)充电
The battery needs to be charged.这电池需要充电了。
vi.索价;收费[(+for)]
The store doesn't charge for delivery.该店免费送货。
n.费用,价钱,索价[C][(+for)]
The charge for admission is US$5.入场费五美元。
掌管;照顾;责任[U]
控告,指控[C][(+against/of)]
He was arrested on the charge of robbery.他因被控犯有抢劫罪而被捕。
at one's own charge(s)自费, 用自己的钱
have (the) charge of负责..., 主管...
in charge of 负全责, 经管, 照顾;在...掌管之下, 由...经管
in the charge of sb.由某人负责, 由某人照料[管理]
on the charge of因...罪, 因...嫌疑
3 blame：可以用作动词和名词，主要义项有：归咎于；责怪；责任等。作动词没有用语言责骂的意思。构成短语：blame sb. for…“因某事责备某人”；blame sth. on sb.; put/ lay the blame on sb.“把某事归咎于某人”；be to blame (for…)注意该短语中的不定式to blame为主动形式，但表示被动意思。
Eg. He blamed me for my carelessness.
Comrade Li is not to blame for the accident.
注意：比较scold表示唠唠叨叨地“数说”，而不是用肮脏语言骂人。一般多用于母亲对孩子、妻子对丈夫等情况。
Eg. The mother scolded the boy for not cleaning up his room.
4 loss n.丧失;遗失[U]
He suffered a temporary loss of memory.他暂时丧失了记忆。
损失;亏损(额)[C][U]
It is a great loss to her.这是她的巨大损失。
His death means a great loss to science.他的死是科学的重大损失。
输,失败[U][C]
The loss of the first game did not discourage them.
第一场比赛的失败并没有令他们沮丧。
短语：
at a loss ①低于成本的：sell the merchandise at a loss.赔本卖出货物
②迷惑的；不解的：I am at a loss to understand those remarks. 我不理解那些话
make a loss亏损
stand the loss赔偿损失, 承受损失
suffer losses遭受损失
5 annoy：用作动词，主要表示“打扰；使烦恼”的意思。构成短语：annoy…with sth./by doing sth.; be annoyed with/at…。
Eg. These flies are annoying me.
Don’t annoy your neighbor by singing loudly at night.
She was annoyed with him because he was late.
注意：同义词：trouble。比较：interrupt“打断某人的话”，
6 associate vt.联合, 结交; 加入
由...联想到..., 把...联系起来
associate one thing with another把某一事与另一事联系起来
We associate China with the Greet Wall.我们想起中国, 就联想到长城。
习惯用语
associate oneself with加入; 参与; 与...发生联系
associate with和...来往, 和...共事, 同...联合; (在思想上)同...联系在一起
7 appeal vi.呼吁,恳求[(+to/for)][+to-v]
He appealed to me for help.他向我求援。
He appealed to his friends for support.他请求朋友支持。
诉诸,求助[(+to)]
We will appeal to a great variety of sources of information.我们将求助于多种资料来源。
有吸引力,迎合爱好[W][(+to)]
The idea appealed to Mary.这主意正合玛丽的心意。
【律】上诉[(+to/against)]
He appealed against the five-year sentence he had been given.
他对被判五年徒刑提出上诉。
习惯用语
appeal to向...呼吁[请求];投合...的心意; 引起...的兴趣;诉诸(武力)
appeal to sb. for为...向某人呼吁[请求]
8 profit：可以用作名词和动词。主要义项有：收益；利润；赢利；益处；从……吸取教训；得益于某事物。用作名词构成词组：earn/make a profit“赢利”；gain profit“获益”。用作动词时的结构为profit by/from doing sth.
Eg. They’re only interested in a quick profit.
They make a profit of ten pence on every copy they sell.
He profited greatly from his year abroad.
I have profited from your advice.
We gained a lot of profit from your advice.我们从你的建议中获益匪浅。
注意：用作名词，表示“利润；赢利”时，既可是可数名词也可是不可数名词；表示“益处”时，为不可数名词。
9 attach vt.装上,贴上,系上[(+to)]
He'll attach the label to your luggage.他会把标签系在你的行李上。
使依附;使附属[(+to)]
This hospital is attached to the medical college nearby.这个医院附属附近的那所医学院。
(与oneself连用)使参加;使附着[(+to)]
He attached himself to the expedition.他参加了那个探险队。
把...归于[(+to)]
How can you attach the blame for this accident to the taxi-driver?
你怎么能把这次事故的责任归于出租车司机呢?
注意：在表示“系、拴”的意思时，还可以用fasten和tie。表示“系在……的上面”，可用短语attach/fasten/tie… to…。
attached adj.依恋；爱慕be attached to…;
10 deliver：用作动词，主要义项有：递送；传送；引渡；自首；发表演讲等。常用结构为deliver…to…。
Eg. The mailman delivers the mail twice a day in this area.
He delivered himself to the police.
He delivered a long speech.
11 make sense, make sense of
make sense讲得通，有道理，有意义，是明智的，是合理的
make sense of搞清...的意思
12 figure, shape
figure n.数字；人像；肖像；图表；人影 v.出现；（out）计算出；理解；推想
shape n.形状；（模糊的）人影=figure v.做成某物的形状
figure as扮演...角色
figure down算出; 弄清, 了解
figure in算进; 参加; 包括进; 参与; 与...有牵连; 在...出现; 在...担任一定角色
figure out算出, 估计, 推测; 解决; 了解, 领会到; 断定
figure out at总共..., 合计...
figure up把...总加起来
13 get across 使通过；讲清楚, 使人了解；触犯; 与...搞坏关系
Get down to开始认真考虑; 着手办理(某事)
get over越[爬]过；克服; 忍受；复原, 痊愈；
get through 完成；及格；通过；用尽[完]；打通(电话)
get through to(通过电话、无线电等) 与......联系; 与......通话；使......了解
get through with完成, 干完
Unit 6
1 quit vt.离开;退出He quitted Paris after a week.他一周后离开了巴黎。
放弃[+v-ing] He has quit smoking.他已戒了烟。
解除,免除[(+of)]She finally quit herself of fear.她终于消除了恐惧。
【美】停止[+v-ing]Quit muttering!别嘀咕!
【口】辞职I'm going to quit next week.我将在下周辞职。
a.摆脱了...的,了结的[(+of)]
I gave him money to be quit of him.我给了他钱为的是要摆脱他。
习惯用语
be quit of摆脱, 脱离, 免除
quit it[美俚]死
2 burden n.[C]重负,重担;负担,沉重的责任
The old man bent with a heavy burden on his back.老人因背着重负而弯腰。
vt.加重压于,加负担于,烦扰[(+with)]
The government burdened the nation with heavy taxes.政府使国民负担重税。
加负荷于,使载重[(+with)]
He was burdened with a large bundle of magazines.他吃力地捧着一大捆杂志。
3 desperate a.情急拼命的,铤而走险的
A desperate man will stop at nothing to get what he wants.
一个亡命之徒为了达到自己的目的什么事都做得出来。
His failure made him desperate.他因失败而铤而走险。
危急的;绝望的
He was desperate when he lost all his money.当他丢了所有的钱时,他绝望了。
极度渴望的 [(+for)][+to-v]
He was desperate for work to provide for a large family.
他渴望有个工作,挣钱供养子女众多的家。
4 accustom vt.(常后接oneself或用被动式)使习惯(于)[(+to)]
These people are accustomed to hard work.这些人惯于艰苦的工作。
Adapt to adjust to
5 leave behind：留下, 遗留, 超过
Eg. Wait - don’t leave me behind.
It won’t rain; you can leave your umbrella behind.
相关归纳：（1）leave …alone丢下……不管；不理会
Eg. Leave me alone.
（2）leave off使停止；戒除；省去
Eg. When will the snow leave off?
He left my name off the list.
（3）leave out遗漏；漏掉；删除；忽视
Eg. This word is wrongly spelt; you’ve left out a letter.
Don’t leave me out!
（4）leave over推迟
Eg. These matters will have to be left over until the next meeting.
注意：fall behind“落后”。
6 keep up：不低落, 维持, 继续
Eg. Keep up your courage.
Will the fine weather keep up?
How much does it cost you to keep up your large house and garden?
相关归纳：（1）keep out (of…)不让……进入
Eg. They have shut the door and mean to keep us out.
（2）keep off离开；避开
Eg. Keep off the grass!
I hope you’ll keep out of trouble while I’m away.
（3）keep back阻止；扣留
Eg. She was unable to keep back her tears.
A certain percentage of your salary is kept back by your employer as an insurance payment.
注意：keep up with赶上，不落后。
7 lose one’s way：迷路
相关归纳：(1)find one’s way找到路，设法到达
（2）feel one’s way摸索前进
（3）fight one’s way奋勇前进
（4）make one’s way向前进；成功
（5）force one’s way强行
注意：lose one’s way也可以用get lost表示同样的意思。
8 go about走来走去, 四处走动;着手或忙于(工作)
to go about cultivating the wasteland开始垦荒
go after追求, 设法得到; 追捕
go against 反对, 违背, 不利于
go ahead 先走, 走在前面; 继续前进;进步[展]; 成功;
干吧, 说吧, 开始干
go for 去拿[喊, 找, 请], 尽力得到;拥护, 支持, 赞助
to go for a job求职
She doesn't go for men of this type.她不喜欢他这种类型的男人
go in for 从事于;爱好, 追求, 沉迷于;参加, 加入
Young people should never simply go in for material comforts.年青人永远也不应一味地追求物质享受。
go over 越[渡]过; 走完; 转向(to); 改变立场; 车(翻倒)
复习; (仔细)检查; 审阅; 研究
go through 通过(考试等); 经过;审阅; 检查;经历(困难、痛苦等), 忍受
go without没有...也忍受过去
go off爆炸；（爆竹、铃等）响中断； 熄灭
unit 7
词组
1.care for 关心
2. want all day off 想放一整天假
3. leave…alone 不管，不理会
4 Bring in profits 对某人有益, bring in profits
5. open one's heart freely自由地敞开心扉
6 be in want of 缺乏
7 close up 停歇，关门
8 be concerned with 与…有关
9 display one's sympathy for sb 表现对…的同情
10. have no eye for 对…不感兴趣
11. comment on sth 评论某事
12 read as follows内容如下
13. have an eye for 有眼力，把眼睛盯着，关注； 能判断；能欣24. 赏
14. date back to 追溯到，追忆到
15. get sth wrong 把某事搞错了
16. of late近来，最近
17 on the contrary 相反
18 toast to…为…干杯
19. weigh… by gain 根据利益权衡
20 be well off富裕
21. with confidence自信地
22. do harm to sb 对某人有害
23. be sentenced to 8 years in prison被判8年徒刑
24. be guilty of doing sth有…之罪
25. hand over交出
26. take no notice of不注意
27. attend to照顾，护理
28 at the hands of在…手下
29. do justice 公平对待
30. want revenge for想为…报仇
31. for fear of由于害怕，生怕，以免
32. upon arrival在到达时
33. be on sb's side支持某人
34answer for为…而受责
35. do wrong to sb对某人不公平,冤枉某人
部分知识点讲解
1 conscience n.良心；是非感
have a good/clear conscience问心无愧
have a bad [guilty, an evil] conscience有愧于良心， 内疚
according to one’s conscience = in all conscience凭良心
tell one's conscience说心里话
2. admit (admitted) vt.承认;准许…进入; 容纳=seat/hold/contain vi.容许;承认
admit sb./sth into /to …允许某人进入…获准入学
admit sb./sth. to be adj. 承认。。。是。。
admit sth/ doing 承认…
admit (to sb.) that –clause 向某人承认。
短语admit sb. as的意思为“接纳某人为……”
3. abundant adj.大量的,充足的; 丰富的,富裕的 be abundant in = be rich in= be well supplied with
①There is abundant rainfall in our hometown./ ②Fish are abundant in the lake.
③Iraq is abundant in oil.
4.occupy vt.占(空间/时间), 占用; 使忙碌,使全神贯注;占领,侵占=take/seize;担任(职务)=hold
occupy oneself with / (in) doing sth. be occupied with/ (in) doing sth.
①The table occupies a lot of space.(takes up)
②Is this seat occupied?(taken)
③His lecture occupied two hours.（took）
④The newcomers are occupied in writing letters home.(are busy writing/ are engaged in writing)
⑤the enemy-occupied areas
⑥He occupies an important position in the government.(holds)
occupied adj.在使用中；已占有；不空闲
5.close up (暂时)关闭 down (永久性的或长期的)关闭
6. be badly off穷的，境况不好的；缺少的
cf: be well off= be rich
7 anyhow= anyway：adv. “无论如何；无论怎样”，可以位于句首，也可位于句尾。
Eg. It’s too late now, anyway/anyhow.
Anyway, you can try, even if there’s not much chance of success.
8 care for：关怀, 照顾, 愿意,
相关归纳：care about忧虑；关切；关心；惦念
注意：在表示“喜欢、关心、照顾”时，两个短语意思和用法基本相同。在表示“介意、在乎”时，只用care about，特别在后跟v.-ing时，不用care for。但在表示比较客气、委婉的“要不要……”意思时，用care for。
9 standard, level
standard n. 标准；水准；规格；规范；业务水平
adj. 标准的；符合标准的；公认为权威的
below standard不合格的, 标准以下的
come up to the standard达到标准
double standard双重标准, 不同标准
fall short of the standard不够标准
up to the standard合格, 达到标准
standard of living生活水准
level n.水平线；水平面；级别；水平
adj. 水平的；平坦的；同等标准的
10 in want of：需要；缺少
Eg. The house is in want of repair.
相关归纳：for/from want of由于缺少
In honour of 为向...表示敬意 为庆祝
In memory of纪念
In favor of赞成(支持
In face of面临(不顾,公开反对,在...面前
Unit 8
词组
1. make sense of 弄懂…的意思
2. in other words 换句话说；换言之
3. take risks/a risk 冒险
be at risk=in danger
at the risk of 冒着……的危险
risk doing 冒险做某事
4.experiment with 进行试验；进行实验
5.piles of 一大堆；一大批；一大团
6. knock sb / sth down 撞倒
7.that is to say 也就是说
8. fall behind 落后 fall sick / ill fall down跌倒 fall over 摔交 fall into 陷入; 跌入 fall off 掉下 fall back 后退;退让 fall asleep
9 .communicate with 与…联系；与…交流
10. distinguish…from… 把与区别开来
11. adjust to 调整；调节；使适合；使便于使用
12. in the process 在进行；经过；在…过程中
13 in common （团体）共同的；公有的16.make mistakes 犯错误
14.take patience to 有耐心去做….
15. come across 偶然遇见
16. regardless of…不顾 /不管 /不关心…
17 all of a sudden =suddenly
18. be concerned about
19. be anxious about / to do be eager for / to do be curious about
20. more than + 数词 = over more than + n. =only more than + v. =very，深为
more than can/could = not more than + adj./ adv. = very非常
more than one = many a 不止一个
21. get stuck/burnt/hurt/dressed/separated/
washed/changed/lost/married/drunk
句型以及部分知识点讲解
1 stick：可以用作名词和动词，名词的意思为“棒，棍”。作动词时构成短语stick to多表示“坚持原则、计划、诺言、决定等”，还有“继续做某事”的意思。其宾语多是名词rules, plan, idea, promise, decision等。
Eg. Though we all think the plan should be changed, the manager still sticks to his own idea.
That’s my story and I’m sticking to it.
You must stick to the task until it is finished.
其短语有：stick out“伸出；突出”；stick up“突出；伸出；竖立”。
注意：insist也可表示“坚持”。其用法为：insist是及物动词，其后常接宾语从句，这时它有两个含义：（1）“坚持认为”，其宾语从句要用陈述语气；（2）“坚持要求”，其宾语从句要作虚拟语气，即“should+动词原形”。insist on则表示“坚持做某事”，某宾语常用动词-ing形式或名词。介词on也可改用upon，意思不变。
无论insist还是stick都不能与动词不定式连用。
【口】(通常用于疑问句和否定句)容忍,忍受[+v-ing]
I can't stick such people.我无法容忍那种人。
【口】被...难住;以...困住
Are you stuck over your algebra?你的代数题做不下去了吧?
习惯用语
at a stick为难, 困惑
be stuck上当, 受骗;被困住
be stuck with\\over被...缠住无法摆脱, 遇到困难无法进行下去
get stuck in全神贯注吃饭或工作; 使劲干
2 acquire.“取得，获得”指通过漫长的过程逐步获得或学到。
She acquired a knowledge of French.
He has acquired a good knowledge of history in these few years.
Gradually we acquired experience in how to do the work.我们逐步获得了做这工作的经验。
学到;养成
She has mastered English grammar and acquired a large vocabulary without the help of a teacher.她在没有老师指导的情况下,掌握了英语语法,学到了大量词汇。
acquire knowledge of求得...的知识
achieve完成；达到目的，赢得名声
win打败对方；赢得胜利
gain获得(奖项)＝win；赢得(财富、经验)；增加；改善
3 Regardless of their theories , …(p67.para1)
He says what he thinks, regardless of other people’s feeling. 他想到什么就说什么，毫不考虑别人的感受。
1. knock down：击倒, 拆卸, 拍卖出
Eg. She was knocked down by a bus.
These old houses are going to be knocked down.
The painting was knocked down for $5,000.
相关归纳：（1）knock at敲……
（2）knock against撞击Eg. The pickpocket knocked against me on purpose.
（3）knock into撞到……身上
Eg. He knocked into the teacher when he rushed into the classroom.
（4）knock over推翻 Eg. You’ve knocked over my drink!
4 where引导的地点状语从句
If I hear another word from you,you will go where it is really cold.
要是再听到你说一个冷字，我就叫你到真正冷的地方去。
where在此引导地点状语从句，修饰主句的谓语，表示“在……地方；到……地方；无论什么地方”。要注意和where引导定语从句的区别，引导定语从句时，修饰表示地点的先行词(名词)。
例:He left the key where it lay.他把钥匙放在了原位置。
The official policy encouraged people to stay where they were.
政府的政策鼓励人们待在原处。
Please just sit where you want.你想坐哪里就坐哪里。
链接提示
(1)wherever和everywhere也可以用来引导地点状语从句。如:
He is kindly received wherever he goes.
Everywhere I went,people were very happy.
(2)where和wherever可置于possible或necessary之前，其含义为when或whenever
All the experts agree that,wherever possible,children should learn to read in their own way.
5 adopt用作动词，主要有“收养；采纳；采取；吸收”等
例:Having no children of their own they decided to adopt an orphan.
他们因没有亲生儿女，决定领养一个孤儿。
Paul’s mother had him adopted because she couldn’t look after him.
保罗的母亲因为自己无力抚养他，便把他送给别人收养了。
He is their adopted son.他是他们的养子。
Our school has adopted a new teaching method.我们学校采用了新的教学法。
We’d like to adopt your idea.我们想采纳你的意见。
链接提示
短语adopt sb.as...还有“挑选某人作为……”的意思。名词为adoption。
6 .fall behind该短语既可以是及物动词短语，也可以作不及物动词短语，表示“落后；掉队；推迟(和with连用)”等。
例:Be quick,or you will fall behind.快点，不然就掉队了。
France has fallen behind Germany in coal production.法国在煤炭生产上落后于德国了。
Make sure not to fall behind with your rent,please.请不要拖欠房租。
链接拓展
fall into开始……起来。陷入;如:
They fall into lively discussion of the question.他们热烈地讨论起这个问题。
fall away离弃，脱离。如:
All his old friends fall away from him.他所有的老朋友都远离了他。
fall off跌落，减少。如:
He fell off the horse。他从马背上摔了下来。
fall ill患病。如:
His mother fell seriously ill in hospital.他的母亲在医院里病得很重。
fall back 后退;退让
7 .patience un.耐心；忍耐力
构成短语:be out of patience 对……忍无可忍
例:I haven’t the patience to hear your complaints again.我没有耐心再听你的抱怨。
She has no patience with people who are always grumbling.
她不能容忍那些常常发牢骚的人。
If you don’t stop making that noise,I’m going to lose my patience.
如果你不停止吵闹的话，我将失去耐心。
链接提示
patient adj. 有耐心的。构成短语:be patient with 对……有耐心。
8 consequence n.结果,后果[C][(+of)]
I'm quite willing to accept the consequences.我完全愿意承担后果。
重大,重要(性)[U][(+to)]
He is a man of great consequence.他是一个很重要的人物。
answer for the consequences对后果负责
as a consequence因而， 结果
in consequence因此， 结果
in consequence of...的结果， 因为...的缘故， 由于
of consequence有势力的； 重要的
take the consequences自食其果， 承担责任
篇12：高三复习教案SBⅢ unit 19-20(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
一、单元考点提示
1.单词
by sea relate to share(v.) mark with long before turn to apart from tour (be)busy with ( be)determined to do sth. disobey key figure in peace oppose think up take up arms work on keep one’s promise with the purpose of
2.句型
You’d better(not)… Let’s …
You need to… What/How about…？
（I think）you should/ought to…
Shall we…？
I suggest（that）you…
Why not…？ Why don’t you…？
I will…
I have decided to /that…
I have (not)decided wh-clause / wh-word to…
I insist on /that…
3.语法
复习句子成分--宾语
复习句子成份--宾语补足语
二、考点精析与拓展
1.settle vt.定居，解决（事端，矛盾等）安排，决定
We have settled a party on Wednesday evening.
星期三晚上我们安排了一次聚会。
This medicine should settle your nerves.
这种药会使你镇静下来。
They settled their quarrel in a friendly way.
他们用一种友好的方法解决了争端。
2.make up 创造，编造，弥补，化妆，构成，占有
John made up that joke about the talking dog.
约翰编了一个会讲话的狗的笑话。
The number of the college students in the country makes up only 1%of the population.
这个国家的大学生的数量仅占人口的百分之一。
I have to make up the test I missed last week.
我上周没考试，我必须补考。
John and Tom quarreled, but make up after a while.
约翰和汤姆吵架了，但一会儿就和好了。
由make构成的其他短语：
make sense有意义 make faces/a face做鬼脸
be made of /from由……制成 be made into把……制成……
make it成功，达到目的 make out理解；勉强分辨出
make up one’s mind下定决心
3.keep…alive使……继续有效存在/进行
We must keep the good revolutionary traditions alive.
我们必须把好的革命传统流传下去。
How can we keep the fish alive?我们如何使鱼活首？
拓展：keep+宾语+宾补(v.-ing/v. –ed/adj. / adv. / prep. phr)
I’m sorry for keeping you waiting all the afternoon.
很抱歉让你等了一下午。
Keeping the door and windows closed all the time is not good for your health.
总是关着门窗对健康不利。
用keep构成的常用短语：
keep an eye on 留神照看 keep body and soul together勉强生活
keep in touch with与……保持联系
keep time/regular hours守时（有规律）
4.be of +adj. +抽象名词表性质、特征，其作用相当于be + adj.
常用抽象名词：use, value, interest, importance, education, quality等
This book is of no use( / useless).
这本书没多大用处。
The young man is of good education( / well educated).
这位青年人受过良好的教育。
Customers don’t show any interest in goods that are of poor quality.
这位顾客对劣质的商品不感兴趣。
对比：be + of +具体名词 表类属，常用名词：size, colour, age, shape等。
The two children are of an age / the same age.(= This child is as old as that one.)
这两个孩子同岁。
All of these rooms are of a size.
所有的这些房子一样大。
5.be related(to)和……有联系，和……有关
The Dutch language is closely related to German.
荷兰语和德语密切相关。
They are related to me by marriage.
靠婚姻关系他们和我有了联系。
拓展：n. relation
(1)[u]关系，联系（有时可加不定冠词）
Doctors think there is a relation between smoking and lung cancer.
医生们认为肺癌与吸烟有关。
(2)（复数）（人与人或国家与国家之间的相互）关系
I have had business relations with h im. 我和他已有业务联系。
(3)[c]亲戚，表示特别亲密的、友好的关系（relative亲戚，单纯的亲戚关系；在法律上通用。在一般情况下多用relative）
My immediate relations are my parents.我的直系亲属是父母。
6.out of work失业
He was been out of work for over three months.
他已失业三个月了。
In recent years there has been an increase in the number of people out of work in that country.
近几年那个国家的失业人数在增长。
拓展：be out of work = lose one’s work失业be in work在业，有工作
7.apart from(= besides/in addition to)除……之外（表示加上，否定句中与except通用）
The children hardly see anyone apart from their parents.
除父母外，孩子们几乎看不到其他任何人。
Apart from them, I had no one to talk to.
除了他们，没有人和我谈话。
Apart from the price, the hat doesn’t suit me.
除了价格，这项帽子也不适合我戴。
对比：
except：将一个或几个人或物从同一类或普通的种类中除外（表示减法），其后可接名词、代词、副词、介词短语、不定式（短语）或wh-从句。
except for：说明整个基本情况后，对细节加以纠正，其后一般接名词。
except that：用来表示理由后细节，修正前面所说的情况，其后须接从句，可以与except for互换。
except when：除了……的时候
Everybody except John was able to answer it.
除约翰外每个人都能回答。
Your composition is very good except for a few spelling mistakes.
( = Your composition is very good except that there are a few spelling mistakes.)
你的作文很好，只是有几处拼写错误。
I know nothing about him except that he comes from Africa.
除了他来自非洲之外我对他一无所知。
He goes to work every day except when he is ill.
除了生命以外他每天都去上班。
8.由way构成的短语
way of life生活方式 all the way一路上，自始至终
any way无论如何
by the way 顺便说 bay way of 通过……经由
ways and means办法
get in one’s way 妨碍 in a (one)way在某种程度上
in no way决不
lose one’s way迷路 way through 克服困难的途径
under way在进行中
way out出路 ways out of （摆脱困境等）的方法
on one’s way to在去……的途中
feel one’s way摸黑走，谨慎行事 make one’s own way取得成功，发迹
e.g. Tom will get used to the way of life in the U.S.A. soon.
汤姆很快就会习惯美国的生活方式的。
9.key figure关键人物
figure 指有影响力的人物。key原意为钥匙，在此词组中作定语，可译作“关键的”。
figure 的复数形式是figures.
Public figures there welcomed the statement.
那里的公众人物们都欢迎这个声明。
He became one of the leading figures in the country.
他成为这个国家的领导人之一。
10.govern统治、管理，控制，左右，影响
He was unable to govern his temper.
他控制不住自己的脾气。
Don’t be governed by what other people say.
不要被别人的话所左右。
The rise and fall of the sea is governed by the movements of the moon.
海水的潮起潮落是受月球运动的影响。
11.on / upon(one’s )n./v.-ing一……就……
On his return to the lab, he set to work.
他一回到实验室，就开始工作。
On arriving in Paris, he was put into prison.
他一到巴黎就被捕入狱。
The students stood up on the entrance of the headmaster.
校长进来时，学生们都起立。
12.play an important role in 在……方面起重要作用
Such strikes have played an important role in the development of the trade union movement.
此类罢工事件在工会运动的发展中起了重要的作用。
For twenty years, Gandhi played an important role in working for equal right for Indians.
二十年里，甘地在为印度人争取平等的权利的工作中起重要的作用。
同义词组：play a part in…/play an important part in…
13.design
（1）v.目的是，打算给……用
The laws were designed to make life difficult for non-whites.
制定这些法律的目的在于使非白人的生活变得困难。
The room was designed for children.
这个房间打算给孩子们用。
The road was not designed for heavy trucks.
这条马路不是为重型卡车设计的。
(2) n.图案设计
The building is poor in design.这幢楼设计很差。
14.in prison([u])监禁之中，prison 前不加冠词，表示被监禁的状态
He has been in prison for three years.
他已坐牢三年了。
Law-breakers are put in prison.
犯法者被关进监狱。
对比：go to prison坐牢 break(out of )prison越狱
cast…into prison(put…in/into prison)把……关进牢里（表动作）
类似短语：in school/go to school 求学 in hospital/go to hospital住院/去看病
15.march v./n. 游行示威，行进，行军
She was very angry and marched out. 她很生气，大步从屋里走了出去。
The soldiers marched on after a short rest.
短暂的休息之后，战士们继续前进。
短语：a hunger march反饥饿游行 a forced march强行军
on the march在行进中 a long and difficult march一次长距离的艰难行军
steal a march on/ upon(口语)偷袭（尤指以不正当手段）
e.g. The two firms are trying hard to steal a march on the other.
这两家公司正努力试图比对方抢先一着。
16.be honoured as… 作为……而受到尊敬
He was honoured as a teacher.
他作为老师而受到人们的尊敬。
Gandhi returned to India in 1915 and was honoured as a hero.
19甘地回到印度，并且被尊为英雄。
拓展：v./ n honour-dishonour adj. Honourable-dishonourable（反义词）
常用短语：show honour to 向某人表示敬意
a sense of honour廉耻心
an honoured guest贵宾
do honour to向……表示敬意，带来荣誉
on/upon one’s honour以名誉担保
pay/give honour to向……致敬
honour system无监视的考试制度
in honour of…纪念……
with honour光荣地
for the honour of 为顾全……的荣誉
17.oppose v.（反义词：support）反对，反抗
People there opposed their government.
那里的人们反对政府。
I oppose this plan because I think it is impractical.
我反对这项计划，因为我认为它不切实际。
同义词组：be opposed to / object to /be against
His father is very much opposed to her going abroad.他父亲强烈反对她出国。
He objected to working on Sundays.
他反对星期日工作。
We are for peace and against war.
我们赞成和平，反对战争。
另：opposition n.（位置）面对，反对
the house in opposition to each other面对面的房子
find oneself in opposition to sb. on a question
发现自己在某问题上与某人意见相反。
18.possess v.拥有（东西，特性）
They asked him whether it is true that he had possessed two cars.
他们问他是否真的拥有两辆小汽车。
He never possessed much money, but he is possessed of good health.
他从没有过很多钱，但他总是很健康。
同义词（组）：own/belong to/have/be possessed of
e.g. He owns a very good dictionary. = A very good dictionary belongs to him.
19.as follows 如下
He received a letter which read as follows.
他收到一封信，信文如下。
The game rules are as follows.
比赛的规划如下所述。
His arguments are as follows.他的论点如下。
20.value vt.珍视，重视
I value his advice on how to study English well.
我很珍视他的关于如何学好英语的建议。
The may or valued public opinions.
市长很重视公众的意见。
Gandhi valued ordinary people.
甘地很重视普通人。
三、精典名题导解
题1 （上海春招）
Mr . Reed made up his mind to devote all he had to some schools for poor children.
A. set up B. setting up C. have set up D. having set up
分析：B。此题考的是短语搭配：devote…to(doing)sth.
题2 （NMET 北京）
Tow middle-aged passengers fell into dead sda. , neither of them could swim.
A. In fact B. Luckily C. Unfortunately D. Naturally
分析：C。从所给情景可以判断，她们都不会游泳，要填unfortunately.
题3 （NMET 2001）
It is generally believed that teaching is it is a science.
A. an art much as B. much an art as
C. as an art much as D. as much an art as
分析：D。在as(so)…as…中，第一个as是adv.，后接adj，第二个as后接句子。句意为“人们普遍相信，教学是一门科学，同样是一门艺术”。
题4 （NMET 春招）
-It’s good idea. But who’s going to the plan?
-I think Tom and Grey will.
A. set aside B. carry out C. take in D. get through
分析：B。此题考查的是短语动词的含义。A的意思是“搁置”；B的意思是“实施、实现或执行”；C的意思是“吸收”；D的意思是“通过或完成”。
题5 The mother didn’t know was to blame for the broken glass as it happened while she was out.
A. who B. when C. how D. what
分析：A。根据句意，空白处应填指人的who, who与to blame构成逻辑上的“动宾”关系。全句意为：由于打破玻璃（杯）的事是母亲不在家时发生的，所以她（母亲）不知道该责备谁打破了破璃（杯）。
题6 （NMET 北京）
The idea puzzled me so much that I stopped for a few seconds to try to .
A. make it out B. make it off C. make it up D. make it over
分析：A。make it out发现真相，因为受到迷惑，所以试图发现真相。
题7 （NMET 2002）
The taxi driver often reminds passengers to their belongings when they leave the car.
A. keep B. catch C. hold D. take
分析：D。take拿走，句意为：乘客下车时要把东西带走。
题8 （NMET 2001 北京）
-Why haven’t you bought any butter?
-I to but I forgot about it.
A. liked B. wished C. meant D. expected
分析：C。从提供的情景分析，是打算买而没买，应用meant。
题9 （NMET 2001 北京）
Have a good rest. You need to your energy for the tennis match this afternoon.
A. leave B. save C. hold D. get
分析：B。save此为“储存，积攒”之意。
篇13：高三复习教案SBⅢ unit 23-24(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
一、单元考点提示
1.单词
lose the path for ever get away wherever succeed in had best(do) set…on fire blow out as long as clear up at one’s own expense on(the)one hand…on the other(hand) end up(in) (be)suited to/for (be)worth doing open up personally be used to(doing) rely on further prevent from remind although
however
2.句型
I guess/believe… It seems(that)…
It looks as if… It certainly is.
She/He/They must have done…
Will you be free All right. See you then.
On Monday/tomorrow? Yes, I’ll be free then.
How about tomorrow morning/afternoon?
Yes, that’s all right. No, I won’t be free
Shall we meet at 4:30…at? Then, but I’ll be free at…
3.语法
复习句子的成分--状语
复习状语从句
二、考点精析与拓展
1.fine adj./adv./n./v.
(1)adj.美好的，天气晴朗的，（身体）好的，细的
It’s fine today.今天天气很晴朗。
What a fine view it is!多么美丽的风景！
-How are you？
-你好吗？
-Fine, thank you.
-很好，谢谢！（不可用于否定句及疑问句）
First there was a fine rain but then it rained heavily.
开始是毛毛细雨，接着就下大了
(2)adv.很好
Everything went fine.一切顺利
(3)[c]罚金a traffic violation fine违反交通规则罚款
(4)v.处罚金
If you make such a mistake again, you’ll get fined.
如果你再犯这样的错误，你就会挨罚。
短语：fine and 非常，极（强调后面所接的形容词）
one fine day/morning有朝一日
2.find
(1)vt.发现，发觉
She found a wallet lying on the ground.
她发现地上有个钱包。
We found her still asleep.
我们发现她还在睡觉。
He found her left behind.
他发现她被落在后面。
(2)n.发现，发现物（尤指贵重或悦人的）
I made a great find in a second-hand bookshop yesterday.
昨天在旧书店里我有重大发现。
对比：find多指偶然发现，碰见；后可接名词、复合结构或从句。find out指通过观察、探索而发现事实的真相、真情，通过调查找出原因，或发现秘密、错误等；一般接名词、代词或从句。discover指发现客观事物的存在，发现已存在而不为人知的事情；多用于好的事物。
Have you found the book you have been looking for?
你一直找的书找到了吗？
Have you found out why he was late?
你弄清他为什么迟到吗？
Columbus discovered America.
哥伦布发现了美洲。
3.age
(1)n.年龄，时代，时期
The old man died at the age of 80/when he was 80 years of age/when he was 80 years old.
那位老人80岁时去世了。
He is young for his age.
就他的年龄而论，他是年轻的。
What is the age of the church?
这座教堂多少年了？
He was the greatest poet of the age.
他是那个时代最伟大的诗人。
(2)vi./vt. 变老
He is aging fast. Worry ages a man.
他老得很快。忧虑令人老！
I found him greatly aged.
我发现他老多了。
拓展：（1）adj. aged……岁的，年老的
a boy aged ten 一个10岁的男孩
an aged man老人
(2)人生的七期
baby→infant→child→youth→manhood→middle age→old age
婴儿/0→幼儿7→儿童12→青年28→壮年40→中年65→老年
4.come down下来，流传下来，倒塌，没落，病倒，减价
The song comes down to us from the 10th century.（流传下来）
这首歌是从10世纪流传到我们这一代的。
The roof of the house came down during the night.
我听说计算机要降价。
5.clear up（天气）放晴，使明了，收拾整理，解决，了结
The sky cleared up just after the rain.
雨过天晴。
Don’t expect me to clear up after you.
别期望我在你后面收拾东西。（收拾不要的东西）
The police haven’t cleared up the murder case.
警察还没查清那件谋杀案。
His face cleared up as she heard the news.(引申义)
听到这个消息她脸上露出喜悦之情。
对比：clean up打扫干净，整理，获利，赚钱
The students cleaned up the classroom after class.（打扫干净）
下课后学生们打扫教室。
6.as long as/so long as只要
(1)引导条件状语从句
You may borrow the book as / so long as you keep it clean.
只要你不把书弄脏，你就可以借。
As long as you study hard, you’ll make great progress.
只要你努力学习，你就会取得很大进步。
(2)和……一样长
This rope is as long as that one.这条绳子和那条一样长。
This bridge isn’t so/as long as that one.这座桥和那座不一样长。
(3)长达……（表时间）
The old couple have been living in the small town as long as 50 years.
这对老夫妇已在这个小城镇里住了长达50年。
7.tear out撕下，撕掉
He tore some of the papers out of the book.他从书中撕下了几页。
对比：tear up撕碎，撕毁，连根拔起
She tore up the letter.
她把信撕碎了。
The trees were torn up by the hurricane.
树木被飓风连根拔起。
另：tear down拆除（建筑物等） tear sth. in two/half 把……撕成两半
8. get sb. / sth. doing使某人/某物开始活跃或使某物开始工作
Let me try now, I will get the car going
现在让我试试，我会把汽车发动起来。
拓展：get sb. to do sth. = have sb. do sth.让/使某人做某事
get sth. done = have sth. done请人做某事
I’ll get him to do the job.我会让他做这项工作。
When did you get your hair cut?
你什么时候理的发？
9.date back to / date from
追溯到（某个时期），起始于（某个时期），从……时候就存在
The tower dates back to 1173.
这座塔起始于1173年。
The old church dates from the first century A.d.
这座古老的教堂起始于公元1世纪。
My interest in stamp collecting dates from my schooldays.
从学生时代起，我对集邮就开始感兴趣。
10.find one’s way（to sp.）找到；设法找到去……的路
Can you find your way to the post office?
你能找到去邮局的路吗？
Rivers find their way to the sea.
条条江河通大海。
拓展：make one’s way非常困难地前进
feel one’s way 摸索着前进
force / fight one’s way突破……而前进
push one’s way排开……而前进
11.congratulate v.
祝贺，庆贺
常用短语：congratulate sb. on / upon sth. / doing sth.为某事向某人祝贺
congratulate oneself that…因……而自己庆幸
congratulations常用于祝贺语，后可接on，也可单独用。
I’d like to congratulate you on your success.
对你的成功我表示祝贺。
I’d like to offer my congratulations on your success.
对你的成功我表示祝贺。
You really should congratulate yourself on your appearance.
(= You really should congratulate that you are so handsome.)
你真该为自己的外表而庆幸。
对比：celebrate sth.庆贺某事
We’ll celebrate the New Year with a dance party.
我们将举行跳舞晚会以庆贺新年。
拓展：in celebration of… 庆祝……
hold a celebration举行庆祝（会）
12.admire（= respect / praise）vt.羡慕，钦佩，夸奖
admire sb.（for sth.）佩服某人某事
Visitors to Beijing greatly admire our Palace Museum.
去北京的游人极其羡慕我们的故宫。
I admire him for his wisdom.我佩服他的智慧。
别忘了夸奖孩子。
对比：envy（= jealous）vt.嫉妨，羡慕
envy sb.（sth.）嫉妒/羡慕某人某事
We all envy you your good future.
我们都很羡慕你的好运。
13.personally
(1)就我个人来说(= in my personal opinion)，用于表示个人的意见，通常于句首。
Personally, I don’t see much difference between the two.
就我个人来讲，这两者没多大差别。
(2)亲自
The manager went personally to the hospital to see the worker who was seriously ill.
经理亲自去医院看望患重病的工人。
拓展：person/ c. /人personal adj.个人的
personality / c. u. / 个性，品格；人物
14.end up 结果，结束
He started as an employee and ended up as head of the firm.
他以职员开始而最后成为公司的主管。
The party ended up with a song.
晚会以一首歌曲结束。
If you continue to drive so carelessly, you’ll end up in hospital.
如果你继续这样不小心开车，你会进医院的。
对比：end指完结或终止，为意义最单纯的用语；
close指把已开始的事物像关闭似的加以结束；
finish尤指最后的修饰工作，或把已经做的加以完成；
complete指把不完美的各点或有缺陷的部分加以补充完成。
Let’s end the discussion.
The meeting was closed by the chairman’s speech.
Try to finish your homework before 9 o’clock.
Have you completed your new programme?
15.open up
(1)开门，展开，打开
open up = open the door开门
open up the parcel打开包裹
(2)（景色等的）展现
A beautiful view opened up before us.
一幅美景展现在我们面前。
(3)开发，开辟，创建
open up a new situation / a bright future / more waste land
开创一个新局面/美好的前程/开辟更多荒地
(4)吐露真情
She never opened up to me on the subject.
关于那个问题，她从未对我开诚布公。
16.rely on / upon相信，信赖
He relied on his parents’ advice.
他相信父母的劝告。
I rely on you to tell me all about it.
我要靠你把这件事的来龙去脉告诉我。
Such people are not to be relied on.
这样的人是靠不住的。
对比：rely on / upon指由过去的经验，使人相信对方必定能完成所交代的事情；depend on指依赖别人的支持或援助；trust(in)指深信绝对不会发生被出卖或令人失望的事情。
I rely on his ability.我相信她的能力。
She depends on her friends to make a decision.
她依靠朋友帮她做决定。
He is a man to be trusted.
他是一个可以信赖的人。
It depends on whether you want to do it or not.这得看你是否想做。
17.be worth doing = be(well)worthy of being done / to be done(很)值得做
The city is worth visiting.这个城市值得参观。
(= The city is worthy of being visited. = The city is worthy to be visited.)
18.as we say正如我们所说
关系代词as引导非限制性定语从句，表示“正如”，代埒后面整个句子。
而which引导的非限制性定语从句，没有“正如”的含义，也不能置于主句前面。
As we know, the earth is round.
我们知道，地球是圆的。
Leaves are turning yellow, which means autumn is coming.
树叶正在变黄，这意味着秋天就要来了。
19.as is the case with = as with ……就和……的情况一样
As is the case with his mother, he is fond of music.
跟母亲一样，他喜欢音乐。
As with human, animals also love their babies.
同人一样，动物也爱它们的幼仔。
三、精典名题导解
题1 （2003 上海春）
Unless to speak, you should remain silent at the conference.
A. invited B. inviting C. being invited D. having invited
分析：A。此句考查非谓语动词在省略句中的用法，完整的表达方式为unless you are invited,…
题2 （NMET 2002上海）
Though money, his parents managed to send him to university.
A. lacked B. lacking of C. lacking D. lacked in
分析：C。本题同样考查非谓语动词在省略句中的作用，但此题主语与非谓语动词是一种主动关系，故先排除A、D；lack为及物动词，不需用of。
题3 （NMET 2003 北京，31）
I know the money is safe, I shall not worry about it.
A. Even though B. Unless C. As long as D. While
分析：C。as long as 表示“只要”。句意为：只要我知道钱是安全的，我就不会担心。even though即使;unless如果不；while当……的时候。
题4 （NMET 2003 上海，33）
-How far apart do they live?
- I know, they live in the same neighborhood.
A. As long as B. As far as C. As well as D. As often as
分析：B。as far as 表示程度，范围，意思是“就……，尽……，至于……”，as far as I know 就我所知；as long as 表示时间长度或表示“只要”；as well as 和……一样好；as often as和……一样经常。
题5 （2002上海春）
The famous scientist grew up he was born and in 1980 he came to Shanghai.
A. when B. whenever C. where D. wherever
分析：C。 where引导的是地点状语从句。
题6 （NMET 2003 北京 30）
He made a mistake, but then he corrected the situation it got worse.
A. until B. when C. before D. as
分析：C。before在……这前，句意为：在形式变得糟糕之前纠正了错误。
题7 （NMET 2003 上海，35）
A good storyteller must be able to hold his listener’s curiosity he reaches the end of the story.
A. when B. unless C. after D. until
分析：D。until用于肯定句时，表示“直到……为止”。全句意为：一个好的讲故事的人只能够使听众的好奇心保持到故事的结尾，才能使他们对故事感兴趣。
题8 （2001 上海，37）
He’s got himself into a dangerous situation（境遇） he is likely to lose control over the plan.
A. where B. which C. while D. why
分析：A。首先理解句意“他使自己陷入一种危险的境地之中，他很可能对飞机失去控制”。在此where引导状语从句。
题9 John was so sleepy that he could hardly keep his eyes .
A. open B. to be opened C. to open D. opening
分析：A。该题考查考生对形容词作宾语补足语的掌握情况。当open作宾补时，一般用它的形容词，不用它的现在分词。如：with the windows open/closed
题10 You will succeed in the end you give up halfway.
A. even if B. even though C. as long as D. unless
分析：D。这是一个条件状语从句，unless意为“如果不”，全句意思是“如果你不中途放弃，你最终会成功”。
篇14：高三复习教案SBⅢ unit 21-22(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
（SB3-units21-22）
一、单元考点提示
1.单词
step into take one’s place pick out build up divide up wealthy go through look into turn up check out to the point care for surround to one’s astonishment exact recover one after another tell apart set up come to light
2.句型
I / He /She /can /may… It is possible that…
I/ He /She may not… He/ She is not likely to…
It is likely that… I am not likely to…
You can’t / musn’t… Don’t smoke. Look out!
If you…, you’ll… Don’t be late Take care!
You’d better(not)do it. Be careful. No noise, please!
3.语法
复习和归纳句子成分--定语
复习定语从句和同位语从句的用法
二、考点精析与拓展
1.leave sth. to sb.（在死后）将……留给某人；请某人负责某事
His aunt left all her property to him after her death.
他姑姑死后将所有财产都留给他了。
I’ll leave it to you to buy the tickets.我委托你负责买票。
2.in one’s will在某人的遗嘱中
will作为名词使用时意为“遗嘱”“意志力”或“强烈的愿望”。
Her death is god’s will, I suppose.
她的逝世是上帝的旨意，我估计。
His strong will enables him to refuse all the worldly pleaseres.
他的强烈愿望使他可以拒绝世间所有的乐趣。
Where there is a will, there is a way.
有志者，事竟成。
3.by one’s first marriage 通过或由于某人的第一次婚姻
介词by有许多含义，在此处意为“通过”，相当于through。
He left by the first train.
他乘第一次列车离开了。
The electricity supply is operated by a switch.供电由一个开关控制。
4.check out清点；结账；核实；检查；开票提款
Ask him to check the information out for us.请他为我们核实一下信息。
We’d better check the whole room out in case it has been bugged .
我们最好检查一下整个房间以免有蛀虫。
The trainees checked out all right.
这些培训学员完全合格。
She checked out 6000 dollars.她提款6000美元。
5.for a start/to start with首先，第一点
You have no right to be here, to start with.
首先，你无权在此。
It won’t work：for a start, we don’t have so much money and secondly we cannot get the permission.
那不行，首先我们没那么多钱，其次我们不能被批准。
6.go through 浏览；经历；历经
He went through several houses, but haven’t bought one yet.
他看了好几套房子，但一套还没买。
The country has gone through too many wars.这个国家已经历了太多的战争。
The plan must go through several stages.
这个计划必须经历几个过程。
拓展：go through with完成
He hasn’t gone through with his composition yet.
他还没写完作文。
7.be present at 出席
How many people were present at the meeting?多少人出席了会议？
拓展：present(1)n.礼物
What present do you want for Christmas this year?
今年圣诞节你想要什么礼物？
(2)v.赠予
Now that the sports meet is over, our principal will present the prize.
既然运动会已结束，我们校长将颁奖。
(3)adj.现在的，目前的
I’m not going to buy a car at the present high prices.
以目前的高价，我不打算买小汽车了。
(4)presently(adv.) = soon
She will be here presently.
她不久就会来。
(5)常用短语：
at the present time = at present目前，现在
for the present暂时
8.pass…(to…)将……递给，传达
Please pass me the bread and butter.
请递给我面包奶油。
Pass the word to him that Napolean will come himself.
把拿破仑要亲自来的消息告诉他。
拓展：（1）vi.走过，通过
Because of the large crowd in the street the truck was unable to pass.
因为大街上人很多，卡车无法通过。
(2)n.通行证
Nobody can go into the hall without a pass.
没有通行证，任何人不准进入大厅。
9.pick out认出；显眼；挑选
Can you pick out your brother in the crowd?
你能在人群中认出你弟弟吗?
The houses in the painting picked out in white.
画上的房子以白色而显得醒目。
It’s so beautiful！How did you pick it out?
这么漂亮！你是怎么挑出来的？
10.troop n./v.
（1）n. 一群，大量，许我troops军队，部队
A troop of school children went into the museum.
一大群学生走进了博物馆。
The local people demand the withdrawal（撤退）of foreign troops.
当地的人们要求撤退外国军队。
(2)vi.集合，群集；成群涌向，结队而行
The students trooped up on the sports ground.
学生们在操场上集合。
We all trooped into/out of the hall.
我们成群地进入/走出礼堂。
11.fly
(1)vt.飞跃 +地点或距离作宾语：驾驶（飞机）；（用飞机）运送；放（风筝）
fly the Atlantic / the English Channe/ a distance of 2000 km
飞跃大西洋/英吉利海峡/2000公里的距离
Supplies of food have been flown to the refugees.
补给的粮食空运给那些难民。
The children are flying their kites.
孩子们在放风筝。
(2)vi.飞，飞行，飞跑
Time flies like an arrow. 光阴似箭。
The little girl flew to her grandmother.
这女孩向她奶奶飞跑过去。
(3)n.苍蝇
butter（奶油）+fly（苍蝇）=butterfly（蝴蝶）
dragon（龙）+fly（苍蝇）=dragonfly（蜻蜓）
fire（火）+fly（苍蝇）= firefly（萤火虫）（=lighting-bug,美语）
12.communicate v.
（1）vt.传达，传送，传染
communicate information/feelings/news…to sb.把信息、感情、消息……传递/传达给某人
I’ll communicate the news to you directly.
我会直接把消息传达给你。
(2)vi.通讯，通话
communicate with sb.(by)用……与某人联络/沟通
We communicate with each other by telephone/letter.
我们用电话/信件彼此沟通。
拓展：communication n.[u]通讯[c]消息pl.通讯系统
Radio and television are important means of communication.
收音机和电视机是信息交流的重要工具。
Communications satellite helps the human a lot in many ways .
通讯卫星在很多方面对人类有很大的帮助。
13.beeline n.两地之间的直线；捷径（指蜜蜂采蜜后径直飞向蜂房，这条路叫beeline）
（1）make a beeline for sb./sp.走近路；走直路；向……直行
As soon as the meeting was over, he made a beeline for the pub.
会议一结束，他就直接上了酒吧。
If you want to catch up with them, you’d better make a beeline for them.
如果你想赶上他们，你最好抄近路去。
（2）in a beeline 成直线地，笔直地
The pupils went to the museum in a beeline.
孩子们直接走向博物馆。
14.come to light 发现，暴露（= be discovered / exposed /found out / be brought to light）
Much more new evidence has come to light(has been discovered/has been exposed/has been brought to light),so the judges have to sentence the man to death.
新的证据不断被发现，所以法官们不得不判这个人死刑。
When the old woman died, it came to light that she was actually very rich.
老太婆死后，人们才发现她其实很富有。
15.be different from与……不同
Your idea is different from mine.
你的想法和我的不同。
对比：make sb./ sth. different from使某人/某物不同于……
Her special accent makes her different from others.
她特殊的口音使她与众不同。
16.one after another一个一个地，表示数量多并连续出现
School was over and students went out of the school gate one after another.
放学了，学生们一个接一个地走出校门。
对比：one by one表示按顺序逐个进行或出现
Don’t hurry! You should enter the office one by one.
不要着急，你们应该一个个地走进办公室。
拓展：by and by一点一点地，逐渐地 little by little一点一点地
step by step 一步一步地，循序渐进地
17.amaze vt.使……惊奇 = astonish, surprise
The news amazed us greatly.这条消息使我们感到很惊奇。
拓展：（1）amazed人对……感到吃惊的；amazing（某物）……信人吃惊的。
They were all amazed at the amazing news.
听到这个令人吃惊的消息他们感到惊讶。
(2)amazement n.
to one’s amazement令人吃惊的是
To my amazement, they have gone to Xishuangbanna.
让我奇怪的是，他们去西双版纳了。
类似短语：to one’s happiness/excitement/sadness/puzzlement
使某人高兴的/兴奋的/伤心的/迷惑的是
18.the more…,the more… 越……就越……
The harder you study, the more progress you’ll make.
越努力学习，你的进步就越大。
对比：more and more… 越来越……
Our school is becoming more and more beautiful.
我们的校园变得越来越美丽了。
19.again and again = time and time again = over and over = over and over again再三地
The old man thinks of his happy past again and again.
这位老人再三地想起他幸福的过去。
三、精典名题导解
题1 （NMET 2001）
As we joined the big crowd. I got from my friends.
A. separated B. spared C. lost D. missed
分析：A。get separated from sb.和某人分开。
题2（NMET 2002 北京）
-How are the team playing?
-They’re playing well, but one of them hurt.
A. got B. gets C. are D. were
分析：A。got hurt意为“受伤”。get后接过去分词表示被动，受伤的事发生在过去，要用一般过去时。
题3 （2002 上海春季）
It long before we the result of the experiment.
A. will not be; will know B. will not be; knew
C. will not be; know D. is; know
分析：C。It will not be long是主句，意为不久；在before引导的时间状语从句中，要用一般现在时表示将来。
题4 （NMET 2001北京）
at the door before entering, please.
A. Knocked B. To knock C. Knocking D. Knock
分析：D。这是一个祈使句，要用动词原形。
题5 （2003，北京春）
We’re living in an age many things are done on computer.
A. which B. that C. whose D. when
分析：D。此题考查定语从句要填入的引导词应该在从句中作时间状语，故用when.
题6 （2002 上海，35）
There is a feeling in me we’ll never know what a UFO-not ever.
A. that B. which C. of which D. what
分析：A。根据句意“我有一种感觉--我们永远不会知道UFO是什么，而不是曾经（不知道）。”that引导的同位语从句解释feeling的内容。
题7 （2003 上海）
It is believed that if a book is , it will surely the reader.
A. interested; interest B. interesting; be interested
C. interested; interesting D. interesting; interest
分析：D。interesting有趣的；interest vt.使……感到有趣。
题8 （2003 上海春）
It was because of bad weather the football match had to be put off.
A. so B. so that C. why D. that
分析：D。这是一个强调句，对because of bad weather进行强调，强调句的结构是It is/was + 被强调的部分+that(who)…
题9 （2001 上海春）
It was for this reason her uncle moved out of New York and settled down in small village.
A. which B. why C. that D. how
分析：C。这是一个强调句for this reason进行强调，其明显标志是介词for.
★高三复习教案SBⅢ unit 17-18(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
文档为doc格式
